JP2015070899A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a sense of unfairness caused by a skill difference between players.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes: a game area to which a game ball shot by shooting means is guided; a specific winning hole that a game ball moving in the game area can enter; and an opening/closing member capable of changing a state between an open state where it is made possible for a game ball to enter the specific winning hole, and a closed state where it is made impossible for a game ball to enter the specific winning hole. The Pachinko machine also includes ball-enter opportunity giving means in which, in the case where the opening/closing member is in the closed state when a game ball arrives at a first specific point where a game ball can enter the specific winning hole if the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball is guided to a second specific point where a game ball can enter the specific winning hole if the opening/closing member is in the open state.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters a special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the result of the lottery on a variable display device Fluctuation display for teaching is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, in general, a pachinko machine has a so-called electronic tulip that changes state between an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or cannot enter easily. And a variable pitching device called an attacker or the like. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  Further, such a variable pitching device is designed to be opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, there are many that repeatedly open and close a plurality of times when a predetermined condition is satisfied once. Therefore, when the variable pitching device is in the open state, the game ball is launched at a timing that reaches the variable pitching device, and when the variable pitching device is in the closed state, the variable pitching device is reached. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching game balls at such a timing, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that do not enter the variable pitching device, and thus to increase the total number of game balls that are ultimately acquired.

JP 2003-154110 A

  However, it is rare that a player who executes such a technical operation and a player who does not execute the player or a player who does not perform well may have a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls finally obtained. Absent.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress unfairness due to technical disparity among players.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A specific winning opening through which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
An opening / closing member capable of changing a state between an open state allowing a game ball to enter the specific winning opening and a closed state disabling the entry,
If the open / close member is in the closed state when the open / close member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening if the open / close member is in the open state, the open / close member is Is provided with a chance to give a chance to enter a second specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening if the open state is in the open state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress unfairness due to technical disparity among players.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a perspective view of the 2nd starting prize-winning device. It is a perspective view of the 2nd starting prize-winning device. It is sectional drawing of a 2nd start winning apparatus. It is a front view showing composition of an inner frame, a game board, etc. in a 2nd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable winning a prize apparatus etc. in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd starting prize-winning device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing some 2nd starting prize-winning devices as a modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd start prize-winning apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing some 2nd starting prize-winning devices as a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view containing the partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view containing the partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view containing the partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view containing the partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. 47 which shows the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd start prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (front side) of the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (rear side) of the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. As a modified example of the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view including a partial cross-section for explaining the upper surface shape of the shutter, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a second variable winning device and the like. . It is a front view which shows a 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows a 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. . For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits illustrations of nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame set 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Or the production content is changed.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 so as to protrude to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibiting button 18 a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, A first special display device 43L, a second special display device 43R, a variation specifying lamp 40, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32B, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or lower A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

  In the present embodiment, 10 balls are entered when the general winning opening 31 is entered, 14 pieces are entered when the first variable winning device 32a is entered, and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. There are 13 balls when there is a ball, 2 balls when there is a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and 1 game ball when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Is configured to be paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the ball only by passing the game ball (discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b constitutes variable winning means, the second start winning device 33b constitutes special starting means, and the through gate 34 constitutes normal starting means.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 is provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  A variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

  A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp channel 152 formed inside the center frame 47, as a decorative symbol. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls down on the stage 153 or the like and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends to the front and rear formed at the center of the stage 153. Or drop into the lead-out groove 154 guided forward.

  A first start winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering a game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can win in the case of a corresponding type of jackpot state or the like. Although not shown, the first variable prize winning device 32a has a big prize opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big prize shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, and a big prize for operating the big prize shutter. The first variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening, and driving and controlling the big winning prize solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Hereinafter, for convenience, a region located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 in the game region is referred to as a “left side region”, and a region located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right side region”. In addition, an area located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the game board 30 where the first start winning device 33a and the first variable winning device 32a are arranged on the downstream side of the left side region is referred to as a “lower left region”. That is, a region located on the right side of the game board 30 on the downstream side of the right-side region is referred to as a “lower right region”.

  In the lower part of the lower left area, three general winning holes 31 are arranged at predetermined intervals obliquely along the peripheral edge of the game area (inner rail constituting part 51). Each general winning opening 31 protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side.

  A through gate 34 is disposed in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball support support lottery for determining whether or not a second start winning device 33b, which will be described later in detail, is opened, is performed, and a normal symbol display device 41 is used. The variation display for teaching the result of the pitching support lottery is performed. If the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  Further, a second variable winning device 32b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side region. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won in the corresponding type of jackpot state. Although not shown in the drawings, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening that leads to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter that opens and closes the large winning opening, and a large winning for operating the large winning shutter. The second variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a second count switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening, and controls the driving of the big prize opening solenoid to open and close the big prize shutter. 32b (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Incidentally, the big winning shutters of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment are pivotally supported so that the lower edge of the big winning shutter can rotate along the lower edge of the big winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter extends vertically and closes the big winning opening, so that the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), The game ball that has flowed forward is received by the back (upper surface) of the big prize shutter and guided to the big prize opening.

  In the lower right region, a second start winning device 33b is disposed on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. The second start winning device 33b is also configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The details of the second start winning device 33b will be described later.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b, respectively, for detecting a winning game ball. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state or the like is determined, and special display devices 43L and 43R (and decorative symbol display to be described later) are displayed. The apparatus 42) is configured to perform variable display. Then, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state where the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning lottery and a “high probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning lottery. Further, as will be described in detail later, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 as an opening / closing member that opens and closes the second start winning device 33b (a start winning port 402 described later). In the embodiment, the start winning shutter 405 is opened relatively frequently, and the “high winning state” in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning device 33b, and the start winning shutter 405 is hardly opened. There is a “low pitch state” in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”, and a state that is in a high probability state and a low entry state is referred to as a “latent probability mode”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L, even if the big hit state does not occur. When the variable display on the 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the display is terminated and the mode is changed to the normal mode.

  In the probability changing mode and the time shortening mode, the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to make it easier to enter the ball, while the first starting winning device 33a receives the ball. Therefore, when the player enters the probability changing mode or the time reduction mode, the player fires a game ball toward the right side region (so-called “right-handed”). In addition, at the timing of such right-handed strikes, an announcement for prompting a right-handed strike is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning ball is won in the first start winning device 33a (so-called “navel”) and the second start winning device 33b (so-called “electronic tulip”). , Denchu ”), the winning type is changed depending on whether the winning ball is won or not when the game ball enters the ball (the type determination referred to when determining the hit state type) The table is different).

  More specifically, as a jackpot type when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the 16-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16RS”) and the 8-round probability variation jackpot ( Hereinafter referred to as “8RS”), 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter “8RN”), and 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). Regarding “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a is opened and then eight pieces are provided in the first variable winning device 32a. It is assumed that a game ball of 1 is entered as one round, and “16RS” is repeated 16 times, and “8RS” and “8RN” are repeated 8 times, and then the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” are big hits (so-called “hit with big balls”) in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, but “2RS” This is a big hit that cannot be expected to increase significantly (so-called “no big hit”).

  In addition, “probability change mode” is given after the jackpot state of “16RS” and “8RS”, “latency mode” is given after the jackpot state of “2RS”, and after the jackpot state of “8RN” is finished “Time reduction mode” (in this example, 90 times of variable display) is given. In other words, after the big hit state of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” ends, the second start winning device 33b is in a high-pitch state in which the player is likely to be in an open state. A ball will be fired. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning or winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, 5% is “16RS”, 55% is “8RS”, 30% is the percentage. Becomes “8RN” and becomes “2RS” at a rate of 10%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small win is won in the winning / notch lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. In other words, the first variable winning device 32a is the same as “2RS” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, when “2RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent mode, but the normal mode is continued even if a small win is won. As a result, in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning can be achieved without performing the allocation such as winning the two round big hit (two round normal big hit) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always known that the device 32a has been shifted to the high probability state by being opened twice.

  On the other hand, as the types of jackpots when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, the 16-round probability variation jackpot, the 8-round probability variation jackpot, and the two-round regular jackpot (hereinafter “2RN”) Say). Note that when the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round end) Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13 are different) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, respectively, but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b. The same name (“16RS”, “8RS”) is also used for convenience for the type of jackpot in the case of winning in the winning or failing lottery based on the entry to the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. Certain (eight winnings, or one round after 30 seconds) may be different (for example, the upper limit of winnings for gaming balls in the round is eight and nine).

  For “2RS”, the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. That is, regarding “16RS” and “8RS”, although a significant increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state, “2RN” is a jackpot where a significant increase in game balls cannot be expected.

  In addition, “time reduction mode” is given after the end of the big hit state of “2RN”. In this example, “2RN” is also divided into three parts, “2RN30” to which a time reduction mode corresponding to 30 fluctuation displays is given, and “2RN60” to which a time reduction mode for 60 fluctuation indications is given. There is “2RN90” to which a time reduction mode for 90 displays is given. In the present embodiment, when winning a lottery in the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, it becomes “16RS” at a rate of 35%, “8RS” at a rate of 35%, and a rate of 20% Becomes “2RN30” at a rate of 5%, and becomes “2RN90” at a rate of 5%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small win is won in the winning / notch lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, when a small hit is made, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and this is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. That is, the second variable winning device 32b is the same as “2RN” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, a high probability state such as probability variation mode basically shifts to a low probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning “2RN”. The mode continues. As a result, the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened twice shortly without performing the assignment to win the 2-round probability variable big hit “2RS” in the winning / not-winning lottery based on the winning to the second starting prize-winning device 33b. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is always known that the state has shifted to the low probability state.

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning / losing lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the second that teaches the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. Each of the two special display devices 43R includes two segment display devices, and is configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are at positions that can be visually recognized by the player (in this example, below the second variable winning device 32b and at a position where the right game ball of the second starting winning device 33b cannot pass). is set up.

  Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol switching display (variation display) is performed on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball is displayed on the second start winning device 33b. The special symbol switching display (fluctuation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R in response to the entry. Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  Further, after the special symbols are displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the lottery determination, that is, “big hit”, “ It is definitely displayed that “small hit” or “off”. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a special symbol (a combination of segments to be lit) is switched at a high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). When a predetermined time elapses, any special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for a few seconds). Then, for example, when “hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big win state occurs.

  Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, “16RS”, “8RS”, “8RN”, “2RS” or “2RN” is also taught. The Further, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type instead of one, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases.

  In addition, when a game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game ball won in the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b won. Corresponding to the game balls, up to 4 variation displays (total of 8 variation displays) are put on hold.

  Further, the number of holdings of the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a is disposed above the first special display device 43L and is blue. Is displayed on the first hold lamp 46a that can emit light, and the number of hold of the change display (hereinafter referred to as "second change display") based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b is as follows. 2 is disposed above the special display device 43R, and is lit and displayed by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. Four hold lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same number as the maximum number of hold of each of the first change display and the second change display, and the same number as the number of the first change display or the second change display held. Light. The display contents of the hold lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as sub-control means described later. When a new game ball wins the start winning units 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also held. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display hold number based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (the screen is displayed when the variable display is performed). (Displayed at the bottom).

  Note that the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended sequence, but both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended (hold lamp 46a, When one or more of 46b is lit, the second variation display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b is not fully digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first starting winning device 33a is performed. It has no configuration. For example, in the state where one first hold lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second hold lamp 46b is lit, the first variation display is delayed. Thus, the second variation display is performed first.

  The fluctuation specifying lamp 40 corresponds to which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b the change display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to (the first). (In this example, a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that is visible to the player. The variation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red. When the first variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the variation specifying lamp 40 emits blue light, and the second variation. It emits red light when it is being displayed.

  The variable display unit 35 has a normal symbol display device 41 (a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) that changes and displays when the through gate 34 passes, and a variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. And a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display according to the above.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “O” or “X” can be turned on as a normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from “O” to “X”. → "○" → ... and so on, display the display at a high speed (change display). Then, when the change display is stopped for several seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is opened for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding variation display is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of times the variable symbol display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times. In addition, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display is held is arranged in the variable display unit 35 and is lit and displayed by a holding lamp 44 that can emit white light. Four hold lamps 44 are provided in the same manner as the maximum number of hold of each variable symbol display, and the number of the hold lamps 44 is lit as many as the number of the variable display being held.

  Note that the high pitched state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low pitched state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( A state in which the specified time) is longer than that in the low entry state, and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is released per winning of the winning support lottery is larger than that in the low entering state, (5) the winning probability of the winning support lottery is lower than in the low entering state. And so on. The high pitched-in state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, and the number of times that the winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed. .

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variably displaying decorative symbols as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 supports the auxiliary design based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display area. Displayed sequentially (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). . For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol is hit on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are arranged on the predetermined effective line. And the jackpot state is started.

  Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is made (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered slot, “16RS” or “8RS” occurs, and in the case of an even-numbered slot, either “16RS”, “8RS”, or “8RN” occurs.

  The combination of decorative symbols other than the doublet basically teaches “displacement”. However, in this embodiment, even if the jackpot is “2RS” or “2RN”, the decorative symbol is a doublet. Instead of being stopped and displayed in combination, it is stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach. In addition, “small hit” is also stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach.

  For example, in the probability variation mode, a dedicated probability variation stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode (indicating the game mode in which the user is staying). When the mode is completed or when “small hit” is won, the probability variation stage is terminated, and a pullback stage that cannot be determined whether or not the probability variation mode is set is displayed. When “2RN” is won and the given time reduction mode period ends, the pull-back stage is ended and the normal mode (which is very likely) is indicated. Start displaying the stage. In addition, when the “small hit” is won, there is no change in the game mode before and after the “small hit”, so the probability variation mode remains. Therefore, although it is shifted to the pull-back stage, it is easy to make a big hit. Further, when the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (90 times of special symbol fluctuation display) is exceeded, it is grasped that the mode is the probability variation mode. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the correspondence between the special symbol stop mode and the jackpot type in the special display devices 43L and 43R is grasped, and the stop mode of the special symbol fluctuation display that teaches the occurrence of the big jackpot or the small jackpot is confirmed. If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot is won. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery performed based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, “16RS” and “8RS” are displayed as the jackpot types for displaying the doublets on the decorative symbol display device 42. There is only. For this reason, basically (except when the variable display corresponding to the entry to the first start winning device 33a that has been put on hold is digested), the decorative symbol display device 42 uses a doublet in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. When the jackpot is taught, the assignment of the probability variation mode is confirmed.

  In addition, for example, in the normal mode, a normal stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode, but when “2RS” is won and the mode is changed to the probability change mode, "Is won, the normal stage is completed, and a precursor stage that cannot be determined whether or not it is in the probability variation mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, this precursor stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times with a special symbol variation display when “small hit” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode. After being derived in step 1, it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when “2RS” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. In addition, it may be determined whether or not to return to the normal stage from the precursor stage, or after returning to the normal stage from the precursor stage, the lottery to determine whether or not to move to the precursor stage again (in the latent mode) , It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage). In addition, when the winning lottery based on the first start winning device 33a is won, “8RN” is won, and even though “8RS” is won, the probability change mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If the instruction is not taught, the process moves to the pull-back stage after the big hit state.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  In the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is characterized. Hereinafter, the second start winning device 33b will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. The second start winning device 33b is a substantially box in which a base plate 401 attached along the front portion of the game board 30 and a start winning port 402 that is formed to protrude to the front side of the base plate 401 and open upward. , A second start winning switch 224b (see FIG. 40) that detects a game ball that has entered the start winning port 402, and a closed that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the start winning port 402. A start winning shutter 405 that is displaceable between a position and an open position that enables entry, a solenoid (not shown) that operates the start winning shutter 405, and a game ball is guided toward the start winning opening 402. And a guide stand 407. In this embodiment, the start winning opening 402 corresponds to a specific winning opening, and the opening / closing member is configured by a start winning shutter 405, a solenoid that operates the starting winning shutter 405, and the like.

  The start winning shutter 405 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and is played through an opening formed in the base plate 401 directly above the start winning opening 402 (hereinafter referred to as “accommodating opening 408”). The start winning opening 402 is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 39, in the open state of the second start winning device 33b, the entire start winning shutter 405 is housed in the back side of the housing opening 408, and as shown in FIG. In the closed state of 33b, the start winning opening 402 is covered by the start winning shutter 405. Further, the start winning shutter 405 in a state where the start winning opening 402 is closed is configured such that both side edge portions and front edge portions of the lower surface thereof are supported by the peripheral edge portion of the starting winning opening 402. In the present embodiment, the peripheral portion of the start winning opening 402 that supports the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 constitutes a receiving member. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is formed on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405.

  The guide stand 407 is arranged on the upper right side of the start winning opening 402, and the game ball that has reached the second start winning apparatus 33b from the upstream side of the game area is viewed from the start winning opening 402 in a substantially fixed direction. Then, it is provided to guide from the upper right. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second start winning device 33 b is provided by various game members such as game nails and decorations provided above the second start winning device 33 b. First, the movement route of the game ball is limited so that the game ball that has reached the point of entry always enters the guide stand 407. That is, a game ball that enters the second start winning device 33b (possibly entering the start winning port 402) jumps out from the guide stand 407 toward the upper position of the start winning shutter 405 that is located on the lower left side. The operation is to be performed. In the present embodiment, the position at which the game ball is guided by the guide stand 407 and jumps out corresponds to a specific point, and the start winning shutter 405 is arranged at the specific point.

  Further, the various game members that guide the game balls to the guide table 407 are configured so that the momentum of the game balls that reach the guide table 407 is suppressed as much as possible (for example, the guide surface is not abrupt and has a gentle slope near the horizontal direction). Etc.). Thereby, the speed of the game ball guided by the guide stand 407, the pop-out angle, and the like are approximated as much as possible. In the present embodiment, the guide stand 407, and a game nail, a decorative accessory, and the like that guide the game ball to the guide stand 407 constitute a rectifier.

  Between the winning box 403 and the guide stand 407, an opening through which a game ball can pass (hereinafter referred to as “discharge opening 411”) is provided. That is, a game ball that does not enter the start winning opening 402 is discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b through the discharge opening 411.

  Now, on the upper surface side of the winning box 403, an introduction path 412 is formed adjacent to the left side of the start winning opening 402 for guiding the game ball to the rear (the back side of the game board 30). That is, when the start winning port 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405 (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position), the game guided from the upper right to the start winning port 402 side by the guide base 407. The ball is restricted from being awarded to the start prize opening 402 by the start prize shutter 405, and passes the upper surface of the start prize shutter 405 by the momentum guided from the guide stand 407, and is adjacent to the left side of the start prize shutter 405. It will approach to the introduction path 412 to be performed.

  The upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 and the introduction path 412 of the present embodiment are inclined downward to the right. However, the game balls guided from the guide base 407 are guided so that they can move as they run up. The inclination, length, relative position, and the like of the table 407 are designed.

  Further, the base plate 401 is formed with an opening communicating with the introduction path 412 (hereinafter referred to as a “detour opening 413”). The bypass opening 413 is formed over the introduction path 412 and the left part of the start winning opening 402.

  Further, a turn box 415 having a re-entry path 414 for discharging the game ball that has entered the detour opening 413 from the introduction path 412 to the upper side of the start winning opening 402 is attached to the rear surface side of the base plate 401. ing. The re-entry path 414 includes a left-side forward path 416 and a right-side return path 417 with the central portion in the horizontal width direction of the turn box 415 as a boundary. The rear end portions of the forward path 416 and the backward path 417 are continuous, but a partition rib 418 is formed so that the forward portion of the forward path 416 and the backward path 417 cannot be moved between the forward path 416 and the backward path 417. The forward path 416 is continuous with the introduction path 412 via the bypass opening 413 and is inclined rearward and to the right. The return path 417 is continuous with the rear portion of the forward path 416 and is connected to the detour opening 413 located immediately above the start winning opening 402, and is inclined forward.

  When the flow of game balls in the second start winning device 33b is confirmed, first, when the game ball guided by the guide base 407 and jumped out to the start winning port 402 side reaches the position directly above the starting winning port 402. When the start winning opening 402 is opened, the game ball jumps into the opened opening winning opening 402 as it is and is detected by the second start winning switch 224b.

  On the other hand, when the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405 when the game ball that has been guided by the guide table 407 and jumped out to the starting winning opening 402 side reaches directly above the start winning opening 402. When the game ball lands on the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405, the game ball moves to the left as it is and enters the introduction path 412. Furthermore, it will jump out of the start winning opening 402 again from the introduction path 412 via the re-entry path 414. At this time, if the start winning port 402 is open, the start winning port 402 is won. On the other hand, if the start winning port 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405, the top winning shutter 405 is covered by the upper surface. It is guided to the lower right and discharged from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second start winning device 33b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is substantially open (the start winning port 402 is substantially opened) in the high pitched state in the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode. ing). For example, in the high pitched state, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery is 99/100, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol for displaying the result of the pitching support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and at the time of winning the pitching support lottery Opening for 4 seconds is repeated 3 times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds. For this reason, even if the start winning port 402 happens to be closed when it jumps out of the guide stand 407 and is positioned directly above the starting winning port 402, the start winning port is again opened via the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. When reaching just above 402, there is a very high possibility that the start winning opening 402 is open. In the present embodiment, the time from jumping out of the guide stand 407 to the upper side of the start winning opening 402 via the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 is approximately 1 second. Assumes ~ 2 seconds.

  Furthermore, even if a predetermined game ball tries to enter the start winning opening 402 for the second time, even if the start winning shutter 405 is closed and the start winning opening 402 cannot be won, the game ball is started. If it is on the upper surface of the winning shutter 405, the player enters the start winning opening 402. In particular, in the present embodiment, the return path 417 of the re-entry path 414 is located at the upstream left side portion of the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 inclined downward toward the right discharge opening 411. It is connected to the left part of the starting winning opening 402. For this reason, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position when the game ball jumps from the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the game ball remains for a relatively long time (start winning shutter). It is configured to stay on the start winning shutter 405 (by rolling as long as possible from the left side to the right side of the upper surface of 405).

  Therefore, in the high pitching state, if a right hand is made, almost all game balls will enter the start winning opening 402 of the second start winning device 33b. Thereby, in this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (when a game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 224b). However, the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode can be enjoyed without substantially reducing the number of game balls held by the player. In addition, since the suspension of the special symbol variation display is hardly interrupted, the game can be progressed in a refreshing manner.

  On the other hand, in the low entry state, the winning probability of the entrance support lottery is 1/100, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is 8 seconds, and when the entrance support lottery is won, the release for 0.4 seconds is 1 Only once. For this reason, even if “right-handed” is performed in the normal mode or the latent probability mode, it is hardly expected that a game ball is inserted into the second starting prize-winning device 33b and a winning / failing lottery is received. Therefore, in the normal mode and the latent mode, the game ball has such a launch strength that the game ball flows in the “left side region” on the left side of the variable display unit 35 for the purpose of entering the first start winning device 33a. Will be fired ("left-handed"). By the way, in this embodiment, when a game ball is “left-handed”, the game ball cannot be entered into the second variable winning device 32b and the second starting winning device 33b, and the game ball is passed through. 34 cannot be passed. Further, when the game ball is “right-handed”, the game ball cannot enter the first variable winning device 32a and the first starting winning device 33a.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided on the downstream side of the game area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b. In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, almost all game balls moving in the right side region are blocked by the shutter of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second variable winning device 32b. The device 32b is awarded a prize. For this reason, during the big hit state round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the game ball hardly flows to the second starting winning device 33b side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 constitute a time difference passage opportunity giving means. Further, the entrance support lottery corresponds to an open / close lottery, the first state corresponds to a low entrance state, and the second state corresponds to a high entrance state. In addition, the function of performing the entrance support lottery of the main controller 261, which will be described in detail later, constitutes an open / close lottery means.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 of the front frame set 14 includes A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning ports corresponding to various winning ports such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, and the through gate switch 225 through a cable connector. A one-panel relay board is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 through a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a big prize opening solenoid that opens the big prize opening in the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b. A winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the starting winning shutter 405 in the starting winning device 33b is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability variation mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. Terminals for outputting information related to the opening of 12, terminals for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes a prize opening switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, start winning prize switches 224a and 224b, through gate switches 225, and various switches of the handle 18. And various electrical components such as a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46 a and 46 b, the effect button 125, various lighting units and the lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is displayed that the jackpot is won by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261, and the sub control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, variable display (decorative symbol) is performed as effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (in the special symbol).

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibit button 18 a ( 1 is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success / failure random number counter C1 used for a success / failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a type determination counter C2 used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery), and a decoration The variable selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not the reach state is generated in the symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the corresponding random number counter C1, and the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) used for determining the variation display time, etc. The first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol display device 41 used for lottery (entrance support lottery) The normal symbol random number counter C4 is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern, are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second start winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R can be suspended up to four times.

  Explaining in detail each counter, the success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the success / failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the success / failure random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

  In this embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In this embodiment, there are provided two success / failure determination tables that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, and “7, 307” is a jackpot. There are a first winning / failing determination table stored as a value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8 to 16, 308 to 316” as a jackpot value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning / randomizing counter C1 is used to draw a lottery based on whether or not the winning combination is won when the winning combination is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the random number counter C1 that is a small hit is one and the value is “404”, and the high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode). ), The number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. For determining whether or not to win a small hit, a first small hit determination table storing “404” as a winning value and a second small hit determining table storing “405 to 413” as a winning value are referred to.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning / losing lottery (probability of jackpot) is 1/300, the probability of winning a jackpot (small jackpot probability) is 1/600, The variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is 0.4 seconds. Opened.

  In the probability variation mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which makes it easier to hit big hits and hits compared to the normal mode. In the probability variation mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode. The start winning device 33b is opened three times and each opening time is 4 seconds (opening for 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the probability variation mode, the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the winning support lottery is increased and the number of times of opening is increased. Will increase. As a result, the time period during which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state becomes longer, so that the game balls frequently enter the second start winning device 33b (becomes a high winning state). The lottery is continuously performed and the ball is in good condition. In the high pitching state, the probability that the “O” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the pitching support lottery) may be higher than that in the normal mode.

  In the time reduction mode, the big hit probability is 1/300 and the small hit probability is 1/600. In the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the winning support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is released three times. In addition, each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time shortening mode is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen, although the jackpot probability is the same low probability as in the normal mode. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of “8RN” or “2RN”, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R display a total of a predetermined number of fluctuations (a total of 90 times after “8RN”). Thus, “2RN” is set to the time reduction mode over 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”). Further, the time reduction mode ends when the special display devices 43L and 43R display the specified number of fluctuations even if the big hit state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. In the latent mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. In other words, the latent probability mode has the same high probability as the jackpot probability in the probability variation mode, but is the same as the normal mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is viewed. In the present embodiment, the latent mode is set after the end of the “2RS” jackpot state, and continues at least until the jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, there is no allocation that “2RN” is won, so the latent probability mode ends quietly. This situation is avoided (continues until winning the jackpot with a lottery).

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 also includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) and a second type determination that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of “0 to 238”, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration corresponding to the detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 37, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode is determined, such as an elapsed time until the middle symbol (in this example) stops. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and it is desirable that they are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 99, the lower limit is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won in the ball state is one and the range is “1.” On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning is displayed after the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time. ("○" in this example) stops Shown, it is opened in a pattern second start winning opening 473 corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). 238, 99) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning unit 33 is executed. In step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na for counting the number of variable display hold times triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a variable display hold time triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b. A second holding counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

  In addition, the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area include a random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a winning random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the success / failure random number storage area stores the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Furthermore, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, there is a variation display (first variation display) based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, or based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b. A fluctuation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is a fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) is stored. Hereinafter, “the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area” is also referred to as “the first variation flag is turned on”, and “the second variation display is performed in the variation storage area”. The information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second variation flag is set to ON”.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 (the random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer are updated). Each stored value) is stored in a first area (a random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) among the reserved areas that are free in the special variable reservation area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big win or a small win. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is newly determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area. A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success / failure determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “7” or “307” which is the value stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in actuality, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7” is determined, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”, and if an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. In this embodiment, in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1, a separate success / failure flag is not provided, but information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the failure / randomness storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes. In step S5102, for example, “101010101010101010” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting for the success / failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success / failure flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second success / failure determination table “8-16, 308”. ˜316 ”or not. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are jackpots only in the probability variation mode. In the determination process, in practice, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. Note that turning on the second success / failure flag here means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the success / failure random number storage area.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable holding area in step S5105 is It is determined whether or not the value matches “404” which is a value stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, “404” is a value that is a small hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, information on whether or not a small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the corresponding random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hit determination table “405 to 413”. It is determined whether or not any of the above. Incidentally, “405 to 413” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information related to success / failure is stored using 2 bytes. For example, when noise occurs, the success / failure flag (the content stored in the failure random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state is generated even though it is not a win, or a big win state does not occur even though it is a win. Further, the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the success / failure determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number storage area. is there.

  In addition to the pass / fail random number storage area that stores the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a pass / fail flag is additionally provided, and at this time, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is kept stored, and a variable display described later is displayed. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, the determination may be made by referring to the corresponding table based on the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. Further, a random number counter for small hits may be provided separately from the success / failure random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

  Next, the second type determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5402, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determining counter C2, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and “16RS” or the like is indicated in the winning type random number storage area. This information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5403, for example, “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating a jackpot type (such as a 16RS flag). explain. Note that the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determining process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RS” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “7 to 13”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, then in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, “00011111” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, in step S5406, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN30” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “14-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN60” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches “18”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the process is terminated after the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5408, since the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is the value “19” corresponding to “2RN90”, in step S5410, 2RN90 After the flag is turned on, this process ends. In the type determination process, it is only necessary to be able to determine the jackpot type. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16RS” having a large number of random values corresponding to winning matches the acquired random number value, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2RN90” matches the acquired random number value.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first hit / no-go flag is set in the hit / no-go determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is large in both the low probability state and the high probability state (a jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5302, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, a separate front / rear flag is not provided, but information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5304 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step S5305, and then the present process ends. Note that turning on the flags other than the front and rear here means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the change display ends without complete reach, the process is terminated as it is. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a process for setting a starting command is performed. In the advance command, the fluctuation information stored on hold (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the fluctuation display) is triggered by either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. And information indicating the results of the determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing are included and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminate | determines by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S512, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in a reserved area (a success / failure random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) in the special variation reservation area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the subsequent step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, a case where a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a case where the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the second starting winning device 33b, Therefore, the distribution of the jackpot type to be given is different.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RN” in consideration of the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “12-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the process is terminated after the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RS” in consideration of the first type determination table in step S5206. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “18, 19”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area A reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S515, a starting command setting process is performed in step S516, and this process is terminated. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the pass / fail determination process. The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, provisional storage areas (working areas) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the validity random number counter C1 are acquired are provided, and the information for determining whether or not the information is stored in the temporary storage area. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special fluctuation reserved area.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout controller 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning unit 33 updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is indicated to the display control device 45 so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Note that the fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally 2-byte binary numbers (the same output method as the hold information command), but for convenience, they are expressed in hexadecimal numbers of every 4 bits. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode and the latent mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is used as the variation pattern command. Is set. In the probability changing mode and the time reduction mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, and “FD16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. Then, “FF11” or “FD11” is set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode even in various reach cases. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “10 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, “FF12” or “FD12” is set as the fluctuation pattern command for the super reach SR1, “FF13” or “FD13” is set for the super reach SR2, and “FF14” or “FD14” is set for the super reach SR3. Is set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. If the premium reach PR1, then “FF15” or “FD15” is set as the variation pattern command. If it is premium reach PR2, “FF16” or “FD16” is set.

  In addition, “FF10” or “FD10” is set as the variation pattern command corresponding to the mode for the variation pattern command corresponding to “completely out” that does not reach any reach state. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time that is completely off is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “6 seconds” in the accuracy variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbol, a combination of front / rear off symbol, a combination of symbols other than front / rear off symbol, a completely out symbol The five categories of combinations are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “AA11”, “AA12”, “AA13”, “AA14”, “AA15”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win a promising jackpot ("16RS" and "8RS" that can be expected to increase game balls) (hereinafter also referred to as "probable jackpot with a ball"), or a normal jackpot ("8RN") where you can expect an increase in gaming balls. In the following, when the winning combination is also called “Normal jackpot with a ball”, the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols with numerical patterns. It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable big hit with a ball”, a probable big hit symbol that is a combination of decorative symbols made up of odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 or 2 , 4, 6 and 8, the variable display is stopped for any combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of even-numbered slotted eyes. Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  Then, “AA11” is set in the symbol command when there is a promising big hit with a ball, and “AA12” is set in the symbol command when there is a normal jackpot with a ball. Then, when “AA11” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the first to ninth symbols as a stop symbol, and “AA12” "Is set, one of the combinations of symbols of any of 2, 4, 6 and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “AA13” is set in the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode corresponding to “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit” is also a combination of out-of-front and back symbols. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “AA14” is set in the command. The combination of completely out symbols corresponds to “complete out” which does not even reach, and “AA15” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete out symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, a combination of symbols other than front and back, and a combination of completely out symbols.

  As will be described in detail later, when “AA13” to “AA15” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “AA13” to “AA15” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for removal, The sub-control device 262 may determine the combination of decorative symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, as with the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning / losing lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, a big win state or a small win state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b is won, a big win state or a small win state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the second variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the start winning unit 33 is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S211 whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal process. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S212, step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Further, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S214 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S216. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S218, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is prohibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the winning situation storage area described later in detail is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the change display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit on the special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the change display of 43L and 43R can be started.

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored during the opening period and the interval period. “2” is stored during the round period, and “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the winning status storage area, and whether or not the big hit state or the small hit state is being determined. It should be noted that the numerical value such as “0” to “3” is stored in the hit status storage area for convenience, and the hit status storage area actually uses 2 bytes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, details will be described later in step S802. In view of the setting state of the special figure display flag to be determined, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if neither the big hit state or the small hit state is in addition to the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S803, and the ball is entered into the second start winning device 33b as an opportunity. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the change display (second change display) is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is suspended and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. Thereafter, in step S807, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a (step S808) It is determined whether or not a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the first variation display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S809. In a succeeding step S810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S810, in step S811, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. Then, after performing the variable display setting process in step S807, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area to be described later is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability change mode or latent probability mode) is set. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, “22”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the case of a high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area is referred to, It is determined whether or not one of the first and second success / failure flags (see the success / failure determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

  In the following step S905, whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not the second variation flag is turned on in consideration of the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area, is displayed to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the entry of the ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON in step S906 in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable hold area. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if "16RS", a 16RS pattern setting process (a process for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “16RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, a 2RN30 pattern setting process is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set on, a 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variation display performed this time is the first variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set on, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in the high-probability state, a small amount indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed in step S923. Set the hit confirmation flag on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirming the occurrence of the small hit state in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit determination flag. Thereafter, in step S924, a small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that a small win has been won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, a small hit determination flag is set on in step S923, and in step S924 After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if neither big win nor small win is found, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 17 reach determination processing) is ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, in the case of “rearward / rearward reach”, a front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if “reach other than front / rear out”, a reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is “completely off”, a deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S931, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is set on. Thereby, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variation display) is established in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the subsequent step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the variation time (the remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S932 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing it in the special variable hold area, the success / failure determination process in steps S505 and 513, and the variable display setting. In the processing, the winning / losing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903, S922, and S925 for determining whether or not the winning / failure flag and the small hit flag are determined based on the situation at that time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 812, and a special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting is performed to perform stop display in the special display devices 43L and 43R in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, the stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss. In addition, a control signal to stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub-control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is ensured. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the symbol command or the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is again obtained. There is no need to add. Again, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production). Yes.

  Subsequently, in step S816, after performing the discrimination information setting process for initializing the hit state and measuring the period of the time reduction mode, this process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “16” is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, “8” is set to the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, “1” is set for the winning situation storage area. In the subsequent step S1007, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for a special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening / closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set. Subsequently, in step S1008, 8 pieces that are the maximum number of balls entered per round are calculated with respect to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable prize-winning devices 32a and 32b. “8” shown is set. It should be noted that the value of the winning counter indicates whether the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have been entered in the first and second count switches 223a during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. 223b, and 1 is subtracted when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes hit type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state. After step S1009, this process ends.

  It should be noted that the promotion effect of the appearance of the jackpot type in the jackpot state, etc. (for example, when the even-numbered slotted eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “8RS” or “16RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after Or instructing that “16RS” has been won in the jackpot state immediately after the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (small hit), or an affirmative determination is made in step S1004 (“2RS” or “2RN”), “2” is set in the round number counter in step S1011. Set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set for the winning situation storage area. In subsequent step S1013, for example, a value “5000” corresponding to an opening period of 2 seconds is set for the special variable timer, in step S1014, “8” is set for the winning counter, and in step S1015, the opening is performed. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If neither the big hit nor the small win is determined and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1016, in step S1017, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit state of “8RN”, “2RN30”, “2RN60”, and “2RN90”, the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is shown for each fluctuation counter. Each time the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1010.

  In a succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1019. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, a short-time end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the process for performing the initial setting for the small hit state and the process for performing the initial setting for the 2RS and 2RN big hit states are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether the state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state or the jackpot state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect (when any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit state storage area), step S1202 is performed. In step S1, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation holding area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203 and 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, “2000” or “500” is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state.

  In a succeeding step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not “1” is set in the winning situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area in step S1206. In a succeeding step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, any of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, which is a big hit with a ball that can be awarded when winning in the winning lottery performed with the first start winning device 33a as a trigger. It is determined whether or not it exists (whether it is other than “2RS”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for which the first variable winning device 32a is kept open is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer. Set.

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and in step S1211, the sub-control device 262 is notified of information indicating that a round is to be started. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are completed and the ending period is started, “3” is set for the hit state storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1213.

  In a succeeding step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1218.

  After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, “8” is set to the winning counter. Further, in step S1220, a process for closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the interval is to be started is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if there remains a time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of winnings per round at the start of the big win state or the small win state and at the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted every time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if a round end opportunity has come without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, if eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1223, and “3” is set for the hit state storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1225. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1226.

  After step S1225 or step S1226, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S1227. Note that when the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1222 in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, so that the ending period is completed. Can not. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1227 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, the first variable winning device 32a is closed, and in subsequent step S1229, an ending command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that ending is to be started. . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is time to end the jackpot state after the ending period ends, the process proceeds to step S1230 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1404, “90” is set to the variation counter. The variation counter is a display of variation for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping. After step S1404, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set on with reference to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403, as in the case where the 8RN flag is set on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, “60” is set in the variation counter in step S1408, and the process ends. .

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, “30” is set in the variation counter in step S1411, and the process ends. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent mode is given after the end of the big hit state. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, “0” indicating that the hit state storage area is not the big hit state or the small hit state is set. Thereafter, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that the big hit state or the small hit state is to be ended, and then this processing is ended. The hit end command includes the game mode set by the end setting process, the number information of the variation counter, and the like.

  Note that the second variable prize-winning device control process in step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10) is basically the second variable prize-winning device 32b as the target of the opening / closing control with respect to the first variable prize-winning device control process. This is executed when the second variation flag is set on, and the only difference is whether or not it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether or not it is a big hit with a ball. To do.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is ON. When the normal figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no normal symbol variation display is held, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, normal symbol variation setting processing for setting and starting normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Here, the common map variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol change display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In subsequent step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether the current state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the small hit state is set, whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high pitched state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  If the determination in step S2303 is affirmative, in step S2304, the normal symbol change display time is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the change time (remaining time) of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41. “100” is set to 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “0”. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning is made when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1 to 99”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if a winning ballot support lottery indicating whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened is won, it is determined in step S2306 that the winning ball winning support lottery has been won. Turn on the indicated entry support flag. After step S2306 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low entry state, in step S2307, a normal symbol is displayed with respect to the general symbol display timer. “2000” is set in order to set the variable display time of 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “1”. In the low entry state, the winning symbol is won when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in step S2309, the incoming support flag indicating that the winning support lottery has been won is set on. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present process is terminated. If the control signal for starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the normal symbol variation setting processing, the normal symbol display device In 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display “O” or “X” as the normal symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X” and “X” are displayed. If so, it is switched (changed) to “○”.

  If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2106 to perform a process of subtracting the general symbol display timer. Each time this processing is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2108, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the general symbol stop display setting, a control signal for performing a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, when winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the “○” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and when it is off, “×” is displayed. Stop displaying symbols.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to perform a general-purpose discrimination information setting process, and this process ends. Here, the common figure discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in an open state is set on.

  Various control signals are output to the second start winning device 33b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the normal variable flag. When the normal variable flag is on, a control signal for driving the start winning shutter 405 to open the large winning opening is output to the second start winning device 33b, and the second start winning device 33b is opened. . On the other hand, when the normal variable flag is off, a control signal is output to the second start winning device 33b to drive the start winning shutter 405 to the opposite side to close the large winning opening, and the second start winning device 33b. Is closed.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high pitching state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 4 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b. Set "1000" to seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, “3” is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter for counting the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second starting winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if there is a low pitching state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. “100” is set. In step S2407, “1” is set to the opening number counter so that the second start winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the normal display control processing timing, that is, the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

  Next, the start winning device control process of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not the normal diagram display flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, that is, it has been determined that the second start winning device 33b is in an open state, but the corresponding normal symbol variation display is still being performed, and at the timing of the open state. If not, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal variable timer in step S2203. In a succeeding step S2204, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second starting prize-winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206 to turn off the normal variable flag. In subsequent step S2207, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-releases counter. Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the ball entry support flag is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the second start winning device 33b is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value corresponding to the open time ("1000" in this example) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. Then, this process is terminated.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control apparatus 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined. If there is a state to be notified, a notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a hold information storage process for storing the information of the advance command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. Note that, as described above, the starting command indicates information indicating whether the winning winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is a variation display triggered by the ball, or whether it is variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

  The hold information storage area includes a first hold information storage area and a second hold information storage area each having four hold areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), like the special variable holding area of the main controller 261. 1 execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a big hit, a jackpot type, a small hit is made according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Information on whether or not and information on fluctuation display such as reach type (fluctuation information) are stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Four pieces of fluctuation information regarding each can be stored on hold. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special change reservation areas of the main control device 261 but also the change information stored in the reservation area. .

  Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area) in step S4102. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103 The first fluctuation hold counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot, reach type information, etc. Store in the first area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the notice information storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the successive notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is to be derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first hold lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four first hold lamps 46a that is turned off) is turned on. State. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In a succeeding step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Whether or not to execute the continuous notice is determined by referring to the notice success / failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type and the game mode. Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, or game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the big hit, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot type, information on the reach type, etc. included in the advance command, the vacant reserved area in the second reserved information storage area Store in the first area. In subsequent step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the extinguished state is turned on (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four second lamps 46b that is extinguished). And The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In subsequent step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and this process is terminated. Note that the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 only corresponds to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4107 for entering the second start winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the out-of-place design symbols CO, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “AA11” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, based on a table (a table for associating the counter value with the decorative symbol), For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a way that “1” (the slot) and 1 if it is “2” (the slot). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  Further, when the symbol command is “AA12” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2”. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined such that “4” (for doublet), “6” (for doublet) if 5, 6 or “8” (for doublet) if 7, 8 .

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning or failing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach / reverse symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear out, and the complete Stored in one of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, this combination is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front / rear (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009 and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is The stored data is stored in the outreach symbol buffer and the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is combined. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth detachment of the RAM 553, and the process is terminated.

  Further, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the time-out symbol counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the complete symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the process is completed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is possessed is discriminated. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first hold lamps 46a that are lit (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first hold lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of change information of the second change display is held, the value of the second change hold counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4206.

  In a succeeding step S4207, a process for shifting the data stored in the second hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit (for example, the rightmost one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting processing in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107) in the execution area of the holding information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big win, and what is the reach type if it is not a big win, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed. After step S4209, this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, such a first variation is performed when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays. If there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. For this reason, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command are received, the sub control device 262 determines a display pattern and the like by referring to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Further, in the display setting process in step S3907, a process for effect control during a big hit or a small hit (a hit display process) is performed, which will be described later.

  In the lamp setting process in step S3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process in step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3909.

  In step S3910, for example, control setting of a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state in which the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performing a variable display; energy saving mode), etc. Perform the process.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 261 to notify the start of the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “16” if it is “16RS” based on the information included in the opening command. Set “8” for “8RS” and “8RN”, and “2” for “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit”.

  Thereafter, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various rendering modes in the jackpot state. Select and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, an effect during a round of 30 seconds at the maximum is set, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if it is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a big hit with a ball is set in step S4711, an ending effect is set for 10 seconds, and then this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit or a small win other than a big hit with a ball, an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period ( Instead of setting an effect by dividing each period (such as 1 second), settings are made so that an effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the ending display is immediately ended in step S4713, and the normal gaming state mode in which the variable display is performed is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above in detail, according to the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the start winning shutter 405 that opens and closes the start winning port 402, and the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. In some cases, the start winning opening 402 is closed, and a game ball cannot enter the start winning opening 402. For this reason, conventionally, a game ball that has been rejected to enter the start winning opening 402 by the start winning shutter 405 does not enter the start winning opening 402 as it is and is downstream of the second start winning apparatus 33b. It will flow down. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is introduced into the introduction path 412 and the introduction path 412 in which the game balls that are rejected to enter the start winning opening 402 by the start winning shutter 405 are guided. A re-entry path 414 for guiding the guided game ball to a position above the start winning opening 402 is provided, and even if the entry to the starting winning opening 402 is once rejected, the entry to the start winning opening 402 is performed again later. It is configured to try to enter the ball.

  Accordingly, among the game balls that are hit right to aim at entering the start winning port 402 of the second start winning device 33b in the high entering state in the probability changing mode and the time shortening mode, the player enters the start winning port 402. The number of game balls to be balled and the number of game balls that are regulated by the start winning shutter 405 and excluded from the second start winning device 33b through the discharge opening 411 without entering the start winning port 402 In the ratio, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the start winning opening 402 can be increased. In particular, in this embodiment, since the start winning shutter 405 has been in the open position for a long time (if the player continues to make a right turn), almost all of the right-handed game balls are started. A winning entry 402 is entered.

  Thereby, the game balls launched into the game area to enter the starting prize opening 402 can be efficiently entered into the starting prize opening 402, and the balls that are launched aiming at the starting prize opening 402 can be entered. It is possible to suppress the situation where it is necessary to fire a lot of game balls in order to reduce the number of useless balls that are not reached as much as possible and to enter the start winning opening 402. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls necessary to advance the game, the burden on the player is reduced (in this example, the payout for entering the start winning opening 402 is one ball. Regardless, in the high entry state, it is possible to play without substantially reducing the number of hand-held game balls), and the game balls can enter the start winning opening 402 efficiently. It is possible to make it proceed in a refreshing manner (the suspension of variation display does not expire and the tempo of variation display can be increased).

  In general, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open position, a game ball is fired at a timing to reach the second start winning device 33b, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the second is selected. By performing a technical operation to refrain from launching game balls at the timing to reach the start winning device 33b, it is possible to reduce game balls that do not enter the start winning port 402. On the other hand, there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not execute them, and even if the number of game balls entering the second start winning device @ is the same per predetermined time, There is concern that there may be a difference in the number of game balls that are fired, and in the long run, there may be a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls that the player acquires. Furthermore, in the development of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, the design was made in consideration of the actual situation in the game hall and the like, and the ratio of the total number of game balls that were launched and the total number of game balls that were paid out (so-called The payout rate is designed to include the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players performing the technical operation increases, in order to prevent the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, the winning probability such as winning / failing lottery is reduced, and various kinds of game balls are paid out. There is a tendency that the possibility that a game ball reaches the winning opening and enters the ball tends to be lowered, and there is a possibility that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation is increased. For these reasons, there is often an unfair feeling between a player who performs the technical operation and a player who does not.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, even when the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the second start winning device 33b when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball enters the start winning port 402. Since there is a possibility of a ball, even if the game ball is continuously fired, generation of a useless ball that does not enter the start winning opening 402 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate or dispel feelings of unfairness with a player who eliminates the technical disparity of the player and does not perform the technical operation (not knowing, not working well, or not intentionally). it can. Also, if the above technical operation is not performed, it will be possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention to it because it will result in a loss. The game can be progressed more easily.

  In the present embodiment, in the second start winning device 33b, a guide base 407 for guiding the game ball to the start winning port 402 from a substantially fixed direction is provided on the upstream side of the start winning port 402, and in the game area. A game nail and an accessory provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b are configured to guide the game ball that has been hit to the right to the guide table 407. Thereby, before the game ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted, and the moving direction and movement of the game ball entering the upper position of the start winning opening 402 are adjusted. Irregularity related to speed can be reduced. Therefore, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the starting winning port 402 is rejected by the start winning shutter 405 is made to enter the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. It is possible to provide an opportunity to bring the game ball to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at a later timing and to further improve the effect of improving the probability of entering the starting winning opening 402.

  Furthermore, since the start winning shutter 405 is configured to slide in the front-rear direction, it can be configured to enter the start winning opening 402 by the action of the game ball falling, and the start winning opening 402 can be smoothly smoothed. Entering can be realized. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 on the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the start winning shutter 405 can guide the game ball to the introduction path 412, so that the movable ball can be guided to the introduction path 412. There is no need to separately provide such a member, and the structure can be simplified, the size can be suppressed, the cost can be suppressed, and the like.

  In addition, for example, when the start winning shutter 402 extending forward and backward is rotated upward to open the start winning port 402, the game ball that is considered to have entered the start winning port 402 is launched to the start winning shutter. It is possible to avoid a situation where the player is blown away. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the start winning shutter 402 extending forward and backward is rotated downward to open the start winning opening 402, a large number of game balls fall on the start winning shutter at the same time when the start winning shutter is opened. However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is released into the start winning opening 402 without being opened.

  In addition, the start winning shutter 405 that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position is likely to be subjected to a relatively large burden. However, as in the present embodiment, the start winning shutter 405 By adopting a configuration in which the front end portion of the lower surface is supported by the opening peripheral edge portion of the start winning opening 402, it is possible to reduce the burden on the root portion side of the start winning shutter 405, and the start winning shutter 405 is the root portion. It is possible to prevent such a situation that it breaks at the side. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is provided on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405 to improve the strength of the starting winning shutter 405 and prevent the start winning shutter 405 from being damaged when a game ball collides. can do.

  In addition, in the big hit state and the small hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, it is in a low pitch state, it is difficult to win the pitch support lottery, and the regular symbol variation time is long. Even if the support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is almost closed due to short time for the second start winning device 33b to be in the open state. It goes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. On the other hand, for example, when the second variable winning device 32b is located downstream of the second starting winning device 33b, the game ball passes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, and the second variable winning apparatus for gaming balls. The approach to 32b is delayed. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the position above the start winning opening 402 through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 to the position above the start winning opening 402 again, even if the position above the start winning opening 402 Even so, if the re-entry routes intersect, the game balls come into contact with each other on the start winning shutter 405 which is the closed position above the start winning opening 402, and the residence time becomes longer. Thus, there is a possibility that the game ball is difficult to enter by the second variable winning device 32b. In this regard, by placing the second variable winning device 32b upstream of the second starting winning device 33b, it is possible to smoothly enter the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, by reducing the number of game balls that enter the second start winning device 33b (the start winning shutter 405 prevents entry to the start winning port 402), the burden on the start winning shutter 405 can be reduced. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being crowded in the second start winning device 33b during the big hit state and causing the flow to deteriorate, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize such a bad appearance. .

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the second variable prize-winning device 32b has a characteristic, and the description will be made with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, focusing on the characteristic part. In addition, since it is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment about a basic structure, while omitting the description, it demonstrates using the same member name and member number.

  The second variable winning device 32b is provided with a mounting plate 431 attached to the front side of the game board 30 and a front winning port 432 provided on the front side of the mounting plate 431 and opening upward between the mounting plate 431 (FIG. 42). ) Forming a ball receiving member 433, a rectangular flat plate-like big winning shutter 434 as an opening / closing member for opening and closing the big winning opening 432, and a big winning opening solenoid 435 (FIG. 42) for driving the big winning shutter 434 to open and close. Reference). As shown in FIG. 42, the mounting plate 431 is formed with a communication hole 436 that allows a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 432 to pass therethrough, so that the game ball is connected to the communication hole 436. Is provided with a winning path 437 that guides the game board 30 to the rear side (discharge path portion 217). The count switch 223b is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball passing through the winning path 437. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 432 corresponds to the specific winning opening.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 42, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. When the big prize opening solenoid 435 is in the non-excited state, the big prize shutter 434 projects to the game area side and closes the big prize opening 432. On the other hand, when the prize winning solenoid 435 is in the illustrated state, the prize winning shutter 434 slides so as to be located behind the front surface of the mounting plate 431, and the prize winning opening 432 is opened. ing.

  In addition, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position where the second variable winning device 32b is closed, the big winning shutter 434 restricts the game balls from entering the big winning opening 432. Since the big prize shutter 434 of the embodiment extends in the front-rear direction, the restricted game ball is placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, at least the upper surface of the special winning shutter 434 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Further, the upper surface of the special winning shutter 434 has no step at least in the left-right direction, and is a flat surface in this example. Accordingly, the prize winning to the prize winning opening 432 is restricted by the prize winning shutter 434 in the closed position, and the game ball placed on the upper face of the prize winning shutter 434 is guided to the upper face of the prize winning shutter 434 and moves to the left. Will be.

  Further, when the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position in a state where the game ball is placed on the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position, all the game balls on the big prize shutter 434 at that time are located below. The big prize opening 432 is won.

  Note that the upper edge portion of the left wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is at the same height as the left side portion of the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 or at a position lower than the big prize shutter 434, and the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434. The game ball that has reached the left side of is discharged to the left of the second variable winning device 32b. Further, the upper edge portion (falling prevention means) of the front wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is located above the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434, and the game ball rolling on the upper face of the big prize shutter 434 is the big prize shutter. It is not located in front of 434.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the game ball is guided to the right end portion side of the second variable winning device 32b by the game nail or the accessory positioned upstream of the second variable winning device 32b. It has become so. That is, the game ball that has moved to the position directly above the second variable prize-winning device 32b falls to the right, which is the upstream part of the big prize shutter 434 that is inclined to the lower left when the big prize shutter 434 is in the closed position. Is configured to do. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is configured to roll from the right side to the left side of the big winning shutter 434.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the slope of the top surface of the big prize shutter 434 is relatively gentle (for example, 1 to 9 degrees), and the top face of the big prize shutter 434 moves to the left relatively slowly. Become. Furthermore, the width of the entrance of the big prize opening 432 of the present embodiment is configured to be as large as possible (for example, 100 mm to 135 mm), and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position has a relatively long time. The state is placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434.

  Further, the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment has a shape called a general electronic tulip, unlike the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment. That is, a pair of blade members 438 are provided adjacent to both the left and right sides of the start winning opening where a game ball can enter. In this embodiment, when the game nail is disposed immediately above the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b and the blade member 438 is in the closed position extending vertically, There is no room for a game ball to pass between the wing member 438 and the blade member 438), and the start winning opening is closed, and it is impossible to enter the starting winning opening. On the other hand, when the blade member 438 is displaced to the open position that opens outward, the game ball can enter the start winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the second start winning device 33b is arranged upstream of the game area (lower right region) with respect to the second start winning device 33b. When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, most of the game balls that have been hit right enter the second start winning device 33b. Further, when the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, the game ball that moves to the downstream side of the second start winning device 33b without entering the second start winning device 33b is the second variable winning device 32b. It is configured so that it is easy to enter the ball (arrangement of game nails arranged in the game area, relative positional relationship between the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b, etc.). In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b (the big winning port) constitutes a specific winning port, and the big winning shutter 434 constitutes an opening / closing member and a time difference passage opportunity giving means.

  As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is the big winning shutter 434. As a result, the winning at the big winning opening 432 is restricted and the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is rolled as it is. When the big prize shutter 434 is set to the open position, the game ball rolling on the big prize shutter 434 enters the big prize opening 432. For this reason, if the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to wait for the next timing when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position in a state where it is possible to enter the big winning opening 432. In particular, in this embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the big prize shutter 434, that is, the width in the left-right direction as the moving direction of the game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 is configured to be as long as possible, and the inclination is also relatively gentle. The game ball guided to the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is configured to stay on the upper face of the big prize shutter 434 as long as possible unless the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the case where the right-handed game ball is discharged from the out port 36 without entering the big winning port 432 while the second variable winning device 32b is opened. The game balls launched into the game area in order to enter the mouth 432 can be efficiently entered into the big prize opening 432.

  Furthermore, even if the opening time of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively short, the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 can be put into the big winning opening 432. That is, a game ball can be placed on the big prize shutter 434 when the big prize shutter 434 is closed, and all of them can enter the big prize opening 432 by short opening of the big prize shutter 434. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without increasing the total opening time of the special winning shutter 434. For example, a game ball is accumulated on the big winning shutter 434 during the big hit interval, and the big winning shutter 434 is opened simultaneously with the start of the round so that the gaming balls can enter the big winning opening 432 at once (in a moment). Round end conditions (for example, 8 winnings may be achieved). For this reason, improvement in time efficiency and the like can be achieved.

  In addition, the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position that closes the big prize opening 432 of the second variable prize winning device 32b extends back and forth. When the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball is moved downward. By moving it, the prize winning opening 432 is awarded. For this reason, for example, the action / reaction of the game ball until the game ball is won in the big prize opening 432 is made rather than the game ball is awarded in the big prize opening 432 by moving the game ball backward and moving the game ball backward. Get faster. Therefore, by setting the grand prize shutter 434 in the closed position to the open position, the game balls that have been restricted from being awarded to the big prize opening 432 by the big prize shutter 434 can be awarded to the big prize opening 432 relatively quickly. Can do.

  In addition, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b by the game nail, the accessory, or the like disposed on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b causes the upstream right side of the large winning shutter 434 to be tilted to the lower left. It is to be guided to the part. As a result, the above-described effect of allowing the game ball to stay on the special winning shutter 434 for as long a time as possible is more reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state has to support the lower surface side of the game ball, and the burden is great when receiving the dropped game ball. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, so that the second variable winning device 32b enters the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that move toward, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the big winning shutter 434.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43, focusing on the second start winning device 33 b that is a characteristic part. In addition, since it is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment about a basic structure, while omitting the description, it demonstrates using the same member name and member number.

  The second variable winning device 32b of the third embodiment is basically the same as the second variable winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and includes a base plate 401, a start winning port 402 (not shown in FIG. 43), A guide stand 407 and a start winning shutter 405 are provided. However, the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 are omitted, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball once dropped on the start winning shutter 405 is discharged to the discharge opening 411 as it is. It is like that.

  In the present embodiment, the guide board 407 is provided with a switching plate 451 that changes state between an open state that allows the game ball to pass to the start winning opening 402 side and a closed state that restricts the passage. A rotation shaft 452 is provided on one long side portion of the switching plate 451, and the rotation shaft 452 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction at a position near the tip edge of the guide base 407. A motor 453 (which may be another driving means) is connected to the back surface side of the base plate 401 of the rotating shaft 452.

  The switching plate 451 of the present embodiment is in a closed state during normal symbol variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 and is in an open state in a stopped display state. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position while the normal symbol variation is displayed, even if the game ball moves to a position above the start winning opening 402, the winning winning opening 402 is won. Since it is impossible, the game ball is dammed upstream of the start winning opening 402. And, when winning in the pitching support lottery, the change display of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the switching board 451 is opened, so that the gaming ball that has been blocked by the switching board 451 Then, the player enters the open start winning opening 402. If the winning support lottery is not won, naturally, the start winning shutter 405 is not opened, and is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  The second start winning device 33b is formed with an accommodation recess 455 adjacent to the rear of the guide base 407. That is, when the game ball blocked by the switching plate 451 in the closed state exceeds a certain amount, the game ball is guided to the receiving recess 455. The bottom surface of the housing recess 455 is slightly inclined downward toward the guide table 407. In the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 constitutes a time difference passage opportunity giving means (stopper).

  As described above in detail, according to the third embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, the game ball that has reached the guide base 407 moves on the guide base 407 as it is. Even if it jumps out to a position above the start winning opening 402, it cannot be won at the starting winning opening 402 by being blocked by the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position. In such a case, according to the present embodiment, the game ball dropped on the guide stand 407 does not reach the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at a normal timing, but the game ball is positioned at the upper position of the start winning opening 402. By delaying the arrival timing, the game ball reaches the position above the start winning opening 402 when the start winning shutter 405 is not in the closed position, that is, when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the open state. Can be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the stop display of the normal symbol variation display, the switching plate 451 that has dammed the game ball with the guide base 407 is opened to allow the game ball to flow down. In the pitching mode, the start winning shutter 405 is almost in the open position at this timing, and the game ball that has been dammed will enter the starting winning port 402. Therefore, the effect of making the game ball launched into the game area to enter the start winning opening 402 efficiently enter the start winning opening 402 is surely achieved.

  Here, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. That is, in the second start winning device 33b of this example, the detour passage 456 is provided adjacent to the back side of the guide stand 407. The bypass passage 456 includes an inlet 457 and an outlet 458 connected to the guide table 407, respectively, and the inlet 457 is connected to a portion upstream of the guide table 407 from the outlet 458.

  Further, although the switching plate 459 is also provided in this example, the switching plate 459 of the present embodiment is such that the rotary shaft 460 extends vertically near the boundary between the inlet 457 and the outlet 458 of the bypass passage 456. An open state in which a game ball moving through the guide table 407 is guided to the downstream side of the guide table 407 and a closed state in which the game ball moving through the guide table 407 is guided to the entrance 457 of the bypass passage 456. It is configured to be changeable. When the switching plate 459 is in the open state, the game ball dropped on the upstream side of the guide table 407 moves straight down the guide table 407 and moves to the position above the start winning opening 402.

  On the other hand, when the switching plate 459 is in the closed state, the game ball that has dropped to the upstream portion of the guide table 407 passes through the bypass path 456 and then moves from the guide table 407 to the position above the start winning opening 402. Will move. That is, the time from when the game ball falls on the guide stand 407 until it reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is delayed. Also in this example, the switching plate 459 is closed when the normal symbol display device 41 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and is opened when the normal symbol display device 41 is stopped. In this example, the switching plate 459 and the bypass passage 456 constitute a time difference passage opportunity giving unit, and the switching plate 459 constitutes a path changing unit.

  As described above, also in this embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, the game ball is started with a slightly shifted timing (slightly delayed). By being configured to reach the upper position of 402, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game ball in the start winning opening 402.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, focusing on the second start winning device 33 b that is a characteristic part. In addition, since it is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment about a basic structure, while omitting the description, it demonstrates using the same member name and member number.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the second start winning device 33b is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the second start winning device 33b is also the same as that of the first embodiment, and the second start. The winning device 33b is arranged on the downstream side of the game area with respect to the second variable winning device 32b.

  As shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc., the second start winning device 33b includes a base plate 471 attached to the game board 30, and a first start winning as a first specific winning port and a second specific winning port. A first shutter 474 as a first opening / closing member that opens and closes the first start winning port 472, and a second shutter as a second opening / closing member that opens and closes the second start winning port 473. 475. Furthermore, a start winning switch 224b is provided corresponding to each of the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473. In this embodiment, the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473 are provided. Regardless of which prize is won, the same treatment is made as if there was a prize for the second start prize-winning device 33b (so that the second variation display is put on hold).

  The first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are configured to be slidable back and forth, and are in a closed position that protrudes into the game area and closes the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 (FIG. 48, FIG. 50) and an open position (see FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) for leaving the game area and opening the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. Yes. Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are integrated and operated by one solenoid 476 (the closed position of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53). It can be displaced to the open position). Accordingly, the opening / closing operation of the first shutter 474 and the opening / closing operation of the second shutter 475 are configured to be exactly the same, and one of the first start winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473 is opened. On the other hand, there is no situation where the other is closed. Also in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are set to the open position when winning is made in the entrance support lottery (open / close lottery) performed by the main controller 261 (open / close lottery means). It has become. The first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 may be provided separately, and each may be operated by a solenoid provided individually.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the first start winning opening 472 is located to the right and above the second starting winning opening 473. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b includes a communication passage 477 provided between the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473. The communication passage 477 is inclined downward to the left while meandering back and forth. Further, the upper surfaces of the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are also inclined downward to the left. In this embodiment, when the first ball 474 is in the closed position when the game ball moves to a position above the first start winning port 472, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 472 is the first. The game ball is regulated by one shutter 474 and guided to the plan communication passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474.

  The game ball that has entered the communication passage 477 is guided to a position above the second start winning prize opening 473 while meandering along the communication passage 477. At this time, if the second shutter 475 is in the open position, the game ball wins the second start winning opening 473. On the other hand, if the second shutter 475 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted from winning the second start winning opening 473 by the second shutter 475 and guided to the left by the upper surface of the second shutter 475, It will be discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the communication passage 477 constitute a ball opportunity giving means. In the present embodiment, the communication passage 477 corresponds to the second specific entry route.

  The communication passage 477 meandering back and forth in the present embodiment receives the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 at the front position of the base plate 471 and then places the game ball at the rear position of the base plate 471. Is moved to the front position of the base plate 471, and again, the game ball is moved to the rear position of the base plate 471 and then the second start winning opening 473 in front of the base plate 471 is moved. The game ball is guided to an upper position.

  Further, a roof member 478 that closes the upper side of the communication passage 477 is provided, so that a game ball cannot enter the communication passage 477 from the middle. Further, the roof member 478 extends to a position above the second start winning opening 473, so that basically only the game ball that passes through the communication passage 477 wins the second starting winning opening 473. It is configured not to be able to.

  On the right side of the first start winning opening 472 (first shutter 474), there is provided a reception stand 479 that is inclined downward to the left and is connected to the upper surface of the first shutter 474 in the closed position. The game ball that has fallen on the reception stand 479 will be guided to the first start winning opening 472 side. Further, a collar portion 481 extending forward from the base plate 471 is provided at a position above the boundary portion between the first shutter 474 and the receiving stand 479. The upper portion 481 is configured such that the upper surface is inclined to the left and right so that the game ball does not stay on the upper surface.

  Although not shown, a game ball that has reached the second start winning device 33b by a game nail or an accessory arranged on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is basically In particular, it is guided to the reception stand 479 on the right side of the collar portion 481 and the collar portion 481. Further, a gap through which the game ball can pass is also formed between the collar portion 481 and the roof member 478, and the game ball may reach the position above the first start winning prize opening 472 via the gap. is there. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, a first start winning opening 472, a second starting winning opening 473, a roof member 478, a reception stand 479, and a front wall portion 480 that closes the front of the collar portion 481 are provided. The roof member 478, the reception stand 479, the collar portion 481, and the front wall portion 480 are integrally formed of a transparent resin material.

  For example, the roof member 478 is connected to the first start winning prize opening 472 in the communication passage 477 and above the portion that guides the game ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the rear of the base plate 471. In the case of a configuration in which the game ball may fall on the upper surface, the portion covering the surface may be configured to be inclined downward slightly toward the right side.

  In addition, the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is provided with an assist winning port 482 that protrudes forward from the base plate 471 on the upper right side of the collar portion 481. When a game ball is detected by a detection switch (not shown) that counts game balls that have entered the assist winning opening 482, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Due to the presence of the assist winning hole 482, the number of winning holes for entering the ball increases when the game ball is launched toward the right side area (right-handed). For this reason, in the time reduction mode (even if the number of winning balls when entering the second start winning device 33b is one smaller than that of the first starting winning device 33a), the game can be played without substantially reducing the game balls. It can be carried out. Further, in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, more game balls are acquired (or the winning ball when the player has entered the first variable winning ball than the case where there is no assist winning port 482). Although it is smaller than the device 32a, it is possible to make up for that, and to make up for it.

  In addition, a gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the assist winning opening 482 and the collar portion 481. Note that most or all of the game balls flowing into the lower right region are guided to a position above the assist winning opening 482 by a game nail or the like. Then, the game balls that have not entered the assist winning opening 482 are dropped and guided to the heel part 481, the reception stand 479, etc., and moved to a position above the first starting winning opening 472.

  As described above in detail, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first shutter 474 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 is in the closed position. Then, the game balls that could not win the first start winning opening 472 are guided to the second starting winning opening 473. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the second start prize opening 473 is given to the game balls that could not enter the first start prize opening 472, and the game balls are given the second start prize device 33b ( The possibility of entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473) can be increased. Therefore, out of the game balls launched aiming to enter the second start prize device 33b, the number of game balls entering the second start prize device 33b and the second start prize device 33b are reached. The ratio of the number of game balls that enter the second start winning device 33b can be increased in proportion to the number of game balls that have not entered the second start winning device 33b. Thereby, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the second start prize device 33b can be efficiently entered into the second start prize device 33b, and fired at the second start prize device 33b. However, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is necessary to fire a lot of game balls in order to reduce the useless balls that have not been reached but have entered the second start winning device 33b. As a result, by reducing the number of game balls necessary to advance the game, the burden on the player can be reduced, and the game balls can efficiently enter the second start winning device 33b. Thus, the game can be progressed in a modest manner (the game is played without changing the holding ball and without interrupting the change display (so that the change starts immediately after the stop display).

  Also in this embodiment, even if the game ball is fired at a timing that reaches the position above the first start winning prize opening 472 when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the game ball is second started. Since there is a possibility of entering the winning device 33b, a waste ball that does not enter the second starting winning device 33b (the first starting winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473) even if the game ball is continuously fired. The occurrence of is suppressed. For this reason, the difference of the game ball acquired between the player who performs the technical operation such as measuring the timing of firing the game ball described in the first embodiment and the player who does not perform the technical operation is reduced. (Virtually lost). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate or dispel feelings of unfairness with a player who eliminates the technical disparity of the player and does not perform the technical operation (not knowing, not working well, or not intentionally). it can. Also, if the above technical operation is not performed, it will be possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention to it because it will result in a loss. The game can be progressed more easily.

  Furthermore, it is configured so that the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball can be adjusted by the reception stand 479, the collar portion 481, and the game nail, the accessory, and the like disposed on the upstream side of the first start winning prize opening 472. Has been. For this reason, irregularities relating to the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the position above the first start winning opening 472 can be reduced. Therefore, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 sends the game ball to the communication passage 477, and the effect of improving the probability of entering the second start winning opening 473 is achieved. Can be made even more reliable.

  In addition, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 slide in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball can enter the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 by the operation of dropping. For example, when the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 are closed with a rotating shutter, the game balls that are considered to have entered the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 are: It is possible to avoid a situation such as being shot up by the shutter and being blown off to the outside.

  Further, the game ball that has reached the position above the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the communication passage 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 in the closed position. Accordingly, when the first shutter 474 for opening and closing the first start winning opening 472 is in the closed position, the game ball can be guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474. There is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding to 477, and the structure can be simplified, the increase in size can be suppressed, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the like.

  Further, the second start winning opening 473 is configured to be able to enter the game ball only when the game ball passes through the communication passage 477, and when the game ball is guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474. It is configured only to enter. That is, there is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 may enter the second start winning opening 473, but a game ball that could not enter the second start winning opening 473 is the first. Since there is no possibility of entering the start winning opening 472, for example, when the game ball is configured to be able to enter the second start winning opening 473 directly without using the first shutter 474 or the like ( Since there is a case of 1 chance instead of 2 chances), the possibility of a game ball entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 decreases. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, first, the player enters the first start winning opening 472, and if that is not possible, the order of entering the second starting winning opening 473 is observed. Thus, the operational effect of improving the possibility of entering the second start winning device 33b (the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473) is more reliably achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is arranged upstream of the game area with respect to the second starting winning device 33b. That is, regarding the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment, it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b and be discharged. More specifically, the current is first rectified by a game nail or a role on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b, and further rectified by the collar 481 or the reception stand 479, and at the first shutter 474 in the closed position. And passing through the connecting passage 477 meandering back and forth, and passing downstream in the direction orthogonal to the second shutter 475 in the closed position, finally the second start winning device The game ball is discharged from 33b. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the winning of the game ball in the big hit state or the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. (Especially, almost all of the game balls that pass through the right game area (except for the game balls that win the second variable winning device 32b) as in the present example) are not included in the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, such a problem can be eliminated. The second start winning device 33b of this example takes longer time (long distance) between the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473 than when the two are connected linearly. Since the communication passage 477 for guiding the game ball from the first start winning device 33a side to the second starting winning device 33b side is provided, this effect is further exhibited.

  In addition, in the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the number of game balls falling on the second start winning device 33b can be reduced, and the second receiving the game balls that fall. It is possible to reduce the burden on the start winning device 33b (the collar 481, the reception stand 479, the first shutter 474, etc.) and the risk of damage.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the first embodiment, the game ball that reaches the upper position of the start winning port 402 again from the upper position of the starting winning port 402 as a specific point through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 The rush route is configured to intersect at a position above the start winning opening 402 (corresponding to the left part of the start winning shutter 405), but is configured not to intersect (so as not to pass through the same place again). May be. In this case, the game ball that has jumped out from the guide stand 407 to the position above the start winning opening 402 collides with the game ball that has jumped out to the position above the start winning opening 402 again via the re-entry path 414. Thus, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which no winning is made at the start winning opening 402. For example, the game ball falls from the guide stand 407 to the left side on the introduction path 412 side of the start winning shutter 405, and the game ball from the re-entry path 414 on the right side on the discharge opening 411 side of the start prize shutter 405. You may comprise so that it may derive | lead-out.

  In the above-described embodiment, although the re-entry route intersects, since it is located above the start winning opening 402, even if the game balls collide with each other at that position, both game balls that collide with each other are in the starting winning opening 402. There is a high possibility of entering. Therefore, compared to the case where the re-entry routes intersect at positions other than the position above the start winning opening 402, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game balls interfere with winning in the starting winning opening 402.

  (B) Further, in the first embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the start winning opening 402 is passed once again through the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414. However, it may be configured such that one game ball can access the upper position of the start winning opening 402 three times or more. For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the start winning opening 402 and the start winning shutter 405 are formed in steps. That is, the start winning shutter 405 includes a connecting plate 491 extending vertically, an upper closing plate 492 extending leftward from the upper side portion of the connecting plate 491, and a lower closing plate 493 extending rightward from the lower side portion of the connecting plate 491. The start winning opening 402 is formed in a corresponding shape.

  Furthermore, in addition to the re-entry path (first entry path 494) located behind the start winning shutter 405, a re-entry path (second entry path 495) is also formed on the front side of the start winning shutter 405. When the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, if the gaming ball is guided from the guide base 407 to a position above the starting winning opening 402, the gaming ball falls on the upper closing plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405. Then, the vehicle enters the first entry path 494 through the introduction path 412. The game ball that has passed through the first entry path 494 jumps to a position above the start winning opening 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 492 in the start winning shutter 405. Even at this timing, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball crosses the upper closing plate 492 forward and enters the second entry path 495. The game ball passing through the second entry path 495 jumps out to a position above the start winning opening 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 493 in the start winning shutter 405. When the start winning shutter 405 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins the start winning opening 402, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the lower closing plate 493. To be discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  In addition, since the 2nd start winning apparatus 33b of the said example does not fit in the space between the game board 30 and the glass frame unit 137, the game board 30 is shaved and the introduction path 412 is arrange | positioned more back, and it guides The base 407 is configured to cause the game ball to jump out obliquely backward.

  (C) In the first embodiment, a propulsive force applying means for applying a propulsive force to the game ball may be provided for at least one of the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. For example, a roller whose upper portion is exposed from the lower surface of the introduction path 412 and a motor that rotates the roller may be provided. Further, for example, moving means such as a belt conveyor may be laid on the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414.

  Note that the introduction path 412 is connected to the start winning opening 402 from the start winning opening 402 because the game ball that has passed the upper face of the starting winning shutter 405 in the closed position above the starting winning opening 402 is returned to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again. It is necessary to incline upward in the direction of separation, and the game ball looks like running up the introduction path 412.

  (D) A buffer that alleviates the impact when a game ball is received, for example, on the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 of the first embodiment or on the peripheral edge of the opening of the start winning port 402 that receives the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405. A material (such as rubber or a relatively soft thermoplastic elastomer) may be installed. In this case, the occurrence of breakage and collision noise can be suppressed. The cushioning material can also be applied to the big prize shutter 434 of the second embodiment and the start prize shutter 405 of the third embodiment.

  (E) In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the game ball is moved to the winning opening immediately for a predetermined time while being ready for winning is embodied in the second variable winning device 32b. It is also possible to apply such a structure to the starting and entering means used for a predetermined lottery such as the second starting and winning device 33b. In this case, it is possible to allow more game balls to enter the starting entrance means in a short-term intensive manner without increasing the opening time, and to reduce the number of prize balls given when entering the starting entrance means. Even so, it is possible to prevent or suppress the speed at which the holding ball decreases from becoming too fast because the number of balls entering the starting ball entry means increases (the ball entry ratio increases with respect to the total number of shots). Furthermore, an increase in the number of balls entered into the starting pitching means increases the chances of lottery, so that it is possible to improve the interest by receiving more lotteries and increasing production opportunities. It can also create new playability.

  (F) In the second embodiment, the large winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is configured to slide back and forth. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration. You may comprise so that the big prize opening opened front and back may be opened and closed, or you may comprise so that rotation is possible. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the game ball that has reached the second variable prize-winning device 32b in the closed state is placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 and in the vicinity of the right end that is one end side in the longitudinal direction of the big prize shutter 434. Although it is configured to move from the portion to the left end which is the other end in the longitudinal direction, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and immediately after the big prize shutter 434 is opened, the big prize opening It is only necessary that the game ball can be moved as long as possible while being able to enter 432.

  For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured as shown in FIG. That is, the big prize shutter 434 of the second variable prize winning device 32b of FIG. 58 extends in the up and down direction to close the big prize opening 432, and opens to the front and rear and opens the big prize opening 432. Is configured to be rotatable about an axial direction extending left and right along the upper edge portion in the closed position. In addition, a receiving member 801 is provided for receiving a game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. The receiving member 801 includes a receiving plate 802 extending forward from the lower edge portion of the prize winning opening 432 and a front plate 803 extending upward from the front edge portion of the receiving plate 802, and is integrally formed of a transparent resin material. ing.

  At least the upper surface (receiving surface) of the receiving plate 802 is slightly inclined downward to the left (the back side of the drawing in FIG. 58), and further inclined slightly downward toward the rear. For this reason, the game ball received by the receiving member 801 moves to the left on the receiving member 801 while maintaining the state of being in contact with the rear prize winning shutter 434. When the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball leaning against the big prize shutter 434 while moving the receiving member 801 is tilted backward because the support of the big prize shutter 434 is released. Guided by the receiving plate 802, the ball enters the large winning prize opening 432 on the back side. If the game ball is received by the receiving member 801 but the big winning shutter 434 is not opened until the game ball reaches the left end of the receiving member 801, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device 32b. The

  Even when the second variable winning device 32b is configured as described above, if the second variable winning device 32b in which the game ball is leaning against the large winning port shutter 434 is opened, the big winning port 432 is immediately opened. In the second embodiment, the game ball can be moved along the longitudinal direction of the big winning opening shutter 434 while being able to enter the ball, so that the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b is increased. Basically, the same effect can be obtained.

  (G) In the second embodiment, the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is moved from the vicinity of one end in the left-right direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434, toward the other end. Thus, the time spent on the big prize shutter 434 is configured to be as long as possible. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position is The upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 may be configured to move a distance longer than the width of the big prize shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction.

  For example, in the second variable prize winning device 32b shown in FIG. 56, a ball entry opportunity for meandering a game ball moving on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 by appropriately forming a plurality of convex portions on the upper face of the big prize shutter 434. A guide groove 811 is provided as an applying means. In this example, the game ball that enters the second variable prize-winning device 32b by the game member such as a game nail disposed on the upstream side of the second variable prize-winning device 32b is moved to the top of the guide groove 811 of the big prize shutter 434. It is configured to be guided to a right end portion vicinity portion 812 (which is wider than other portions) which is an upstream position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), a portion of the mounting plate 431 for mounting the second variable prize-winning device 32b to the game board 30 above the accommodation opening 408 for letting the big-winning shutter 434 in and out (hereinafter, referred to as “the prize winning shutter 434”). The front surface of the upper base portion 813 is inclined rearwardly upward. The lower end portion of the upper base portion 813 (the upper edge portion of the accommodation opening 408) is positioned below the central portion of the game ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and is above the big winning shutter 434. When the game ball that moves is moved rearward, the upper base portion 813 comes into contact with a lower portion than the center of the game ball. Therefore, when the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 is caught by the step that defines the front edge of the guide groove 811. Even if it moves backward and is pressed against the upper base portion 813 side, the game ball is guided by the front surface of the upper base portion 813 and displaced upward, and the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 is relatively moved. In order to overcome this problem, the player enters the grand prize opening 432.

  As described above, the guide groove 811 meandering on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is formed, and the game ball placed on the upper face of the big prize shutter 434 is meandered while being larger than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big prize shutter 434. By moving a long distance, a state in which a game ball can be put into the big prize opening 432 can be kept for a longer time if the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position. Accordingly, in the period in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened a plurality of times, the game ball is played at such a timing as to reach the second variable prize winning device 32b when the second variable prize winning device 32b is in the closed state. Even if the game ball is hit, if the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the game ball immediately moves to a position where it can enter the second variable winning device 32b, but stays within that range as much as possible. The timing when the second variable winning device 32b is next opened can be waited for. As a result, the operational effects of the second embodiment, such as increasing the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b, are more reliably achieved.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is meandering in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big prize shutter 434 that is long on the left and right. A distance longer than the width of the big winning shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction is moved toward the downstream side in the longitudinal direction. Generally, the width before and after the game area defined by the game board 30 and the transparent glass unit 137 disposed in front of the game board 30 is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm). Therefore, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter is meandered in a direction intersecting the short direction of the substantially rectangular big prize shutter, or the central side of the substantially circular big prize shutter. If you try to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter while turning from the outer periphery to the outer peripheral side, it becomes necessary to make the front and rear width of the big winning shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area, There is a possibility that a point behind the front of the game board 30 must be selected as a suitable starting point for the game ball moving on the big winning shutter. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this regard, if the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is simply meandered in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big prize shutter 434, the front-rear width of the big prize shutter 434 is increased. Even if it is not made wider than the front and rear width of the game area, the game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 can be moved a distance longer than the width of the big prize shutter 434 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Further, for example, instead of forming irregularities on the big prize shutter 434, a protrusion projecting inward from the peripheral edge of the big prize opening 432 is formed above the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball opportunity providing means is configured, and the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 is guided by the protrusions and moved while meandering. Even if 434 is displaced to the open position, the protrusion remains in the state of protruding from the opening peripheral edge of the special winning opening 432 to the inner peripheral side. For this reason, there is a possibility that the ease of entering the game ball into the big prize opening 432 may be reduced. If the big prize shutter 434 is displaced to the open position, the guide groove 811 naturally goes out of the game area as a whole, so that such a problem can be eliminated.

  Further, the front surface of the upper base portion 813 that may come into contact with the game ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position in the mounting plate 431 is inclined rearward toward the upper side. Even if the game ball placed on 434 is caught by a step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 moving to the rear open position and pressed against the upper base portion 813, the upper base portion 813 It is possible to displace upward so as to ride over and to get over the big winning shutter 434 (the step of the guide groove 811) relatively smoothly. For this reason, when the big prize shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the big prize shutter 434 is placed between the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 and the upper base portion 813. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is pressed so as to be sandwiched between the game balls and the game ball is bounced off due to the force. Therefore, the game ball placed on the big prize shutter 434 when the big prize shutter 434 is set to the open position can be more reliably entered into the big prize opening 432, and the second variable prize apparatus 32b and the like can be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As a modified example of the configuration in which the predetermined prize-winning opening 432 can be immediately entered as long as the big-winning shutter 434 is opened, it can be moved a predetermined distance. For example, as shown in FIG. Small protrusions 805 may be provided on the upper surface of the plate 802 as entry opportunity giving means. Due to the presence of the small protrusion 805, the moving speed of the game ball that moves the receiving member 801 is suppressed. Therefore, as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the gaming ball stays at a position where it can enter the big winning opening 432 as long as possible, and the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b is increased. The effect of raising is further exhibited.

  Further, for example, the top face of the big prize shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape with a low center and a high left and right, and the game ball mounted on the big prize shutter rolls back and forth left and right, and when the momentum weakens, You may comprise so that it may fall. In the case of adopting the configuration (the configuration in which the game ball is reciprocated to the left and right on the big winning shutter corresponds to the winning opportunity giving means), the gaming ball that has rolled on the big winning shutter is won a big prize. Since it must be spilled forward or backward from the shutter and discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device, a hole or a hole is formed in the game board 30 and the game balls are second variable before and after the big winning shutter. It is necessary to form a passage for discharging to the outside of the winning device.

  In addition, for example, a large winning shutter that is displaceable between a closed position that closes the large winning opening 432 that opens forward and an open position that displaces the lower winning opening 432 downward from the closed position. 434 and a position between the appearance position where the guide groove 811 is formed on the receiving plate 802 by appearing upward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 of the receiving member 801 and the immersing position where the guide plate 802 is retracted downward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 are displaced. A possible guide member is provided, and if the special winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the guide member may be in the immersive position.

  (H) In the second embodiment, the shape of the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited. For example, it includes a rotating shaft extending to the left and right and a plurality of blade-type opening and closing plates extending in the centrifugal direction from the rotating shaft. The wing-type opening / closing plate that is turned downward may be configured so that the game ball that is placed wins the big prize opening 432.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the starting winning shutter 405 of the second variable winning device 32b is in the open position, all the game balls placed on the big winning shutter 434 enter the big winning opening 432. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and at least the possibility of entering the ball has only to be increased. For example, the special winning shutter 434 may be extended to the upper right so as to protrude upstream from the special winning opening 432. Further, instead of the configuration in which the special winning shutter 434 is extended, a start stand such as the reception stand 479 of the fourth embodiment as a rectifying means is provided adjacent to the upper end portion of the special winning shutter 434 in the closed position. A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is passed (dropped) to the start stand and then guided to the big winning opening 432 side. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the speed, angle, etc. of the game balls entering the winning prize opening 432 side, and it is possible to further suppress damage to the winning prize shutter 434. It should be noted that the start base may be configured to be more resistant to impact than the grand prize shutter 434 (equipped with means for reducing the impact, or its own strength is high), or configured to be detachable and exchanged. It may be possible.

  (I) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, a second variable winning device 32b may be configured. That is, the big prize shutter 434 of the second variable prize winning device 32b shown in FIG. 57 is displaced back and forth between a closed position that closes the big prize opening 432 that opens upward and an open position that opens the big prize opening 432. A possible first shutter 821 is provided above the first shutter 821 with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter 821, and is positioned above the big prize opening 432 across the first shutter 821. A second shutter 822 is provided that is displaceable back and forth between a closed position and an open position that exits from the top of the special winning opening 432. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time. In the present embodiment, both are integrally formed.

  The second shutter 822 is slightly inclined downward toward the left. The first shutter 821 is slightly inclined downward toward the right. Further, the first shutter 821 is wider in the left-right width than the second shutter 822, and the left end portion is positioned to the left of the diameter of the game ball from the left end portion of the second shutter 822. Is formed with a stopper 823 protruding upward from the left end. Further, in this example, the game ball entering the second variable prize device 32b is located upstream of the second shutter 822 by a game member such as a game nail disposed upstream of the second variable prize device 32b. It is configured to be guided to a position near the right end portion as a position.

  Then, the game ball dropped on the second shutter 822 in the closed position moves left on the second shutter 822 and falls from the left end, but the game ball is in the closed position. Landing in the vicinity of the left end portion of the first shutter 821, this time moving to the right on the first shutter 821. In addition, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the closed position are displaced to the open position, almost all the game balls placed on the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are placed in the grand prize winning opening 432. You will enter the ball. Note that the game ball that has moved on the first shutter 821 to the right end of the first shutter 821 is discharged to the outside from the second variable winning device 32b.

  When the configuration as described above is adopted, the position and speed of the game ball falling (entering) the first shutter 821 can be limited to some extent by the second shutter 822, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter 821 can be limited. It can be made suitable. Further, not only the game ball placed on the first shutter 821 in the closed position but also the game ball placed on the second shutter 822 in the closed position, the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are moved to the open position. By displacing, the ball enters the big prize opening 432, so that the same operational effects as the second embodiment such as allowing the game ball to efficiently enter the big prize opening 432 are more reliably achieved. .

  In the above example, the game nail may be installed immediately below the second shutter 822. However, the game nail is arranged such that when the second shutter 822 in the closed position is in the open position, the game ball placed on the second shutter 822 can enter the big winning opening 432. In addition, it is arranged so as not to hinder the movement of the game ball moving on the first shutter 821 in the closed position. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are in the open position, and without any contact with a game member such as a game nail on the way from the position above the second shutter 822. When a game ball jumps directly from a relatively high position with respect to the big prize opening 432, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an impact when receiving the game ball becomes relatively large. In addition, such a game nail can be configured to support the lower surface of the second shutter 822.

  (J) In the second embodiment, a game ball is guided (dropped) from the upper left position to the lower right position by a game nail, an accessory, or the like on the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434 inclined to the lower left. You may comprise as follows. In this case, the game ball is dropped in the direction opposite to the inclination direction of the upper surface of the big prize shutter 434, and the (initial) speed of the game ball moving on the big prize shutter 434 can be made as slow as possible.

  (K) In the third embodiment, the installation position of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) is not particularly limited, and there is no basic problem as long as it is upstream of the start winning opening 402. However, if the distance between the switching plate 451 and the start winning opening 402 changes, naturally, the switching timing of the switching plate 451 between the open state and the closed state also changes, so there is a change in the relative position and shape. For example, it is necessary to perform a corresponding design based on simulation or the like.

  (L) In the third embodiment, a synchronization unit that synchronizes the opening / closing timing of the start winning shutter 405 and the operation timing of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) may be provided. As the synchronization means, for example, an interlocking mechanism that mechanically interlocks, a release / operation trigger, and a control means that opens / operates under the same release / operation conditions, respectively, Control means for adjusting the timing by measuring the opening timing of the start winning shutter 405 may be used.

  (M) The second start winning device 33b according to the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b according to the second embodiment, and the second start winning device 33b according to the third embodiment may be used in appropriate combination. Is possible.

  (O) In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the second start winning device 33b is not particularly limited. For example, the first start winning port 472 is arranged on the upper left side of the second start winning port 473, and You may comprise so that a game ball may flow from left to right. In addition, the communication passage 477 may be configured to flow down while turning the game ball, for example.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the second start winning device 33b includes the first start winning port 472 and the second start winning port 473. For example, one start winning port having a wide left and right entrance ( There is one start winning switch 224b for detecting the entry, and the game ball can be entered at the right end and the left end of the entrance, and the intermediate position is blocked by the communication passage 477. Each part may be configured to be opened and closed by a shutter. Note that the number of start winning ports provided in the second start winning device 33b may be three or more.

  (P) In the fourth embodiment, the same privilege is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start prize port 472 or the second start prize port 473 of the second start prize device 33b. However, they may be configured differently. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the game ball is discharged from the second start winning device 33b without winning any of the start winning ports 472 and 473. In the case of a configuration that has a possibility of winning, the benefit that the player who won the second start winning port 473 who has the possibility of winning at a later timing has a thicker (larger / more) benefit than the one who won the first start winning port 472 You may comprise so that it may be provided. As the benefits, for example, the number of game balls to be paid out based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b is large, the winning probability of the winning lottery performed based on the detection of the starting winning switch 224b is high, and the detection of the start winning switch 224b When the winning / losing lottery is performed based on the game, the jackpot type distribution is advantageous to the player, and there are a plurality of start winning switches 224b for detecting the game balls won in the second starting winning opening 472 (variable display of special symbols) ), There are a start winning switch 224b and a through gate switch 225 for detecting a game ball won in the second starting winning opening 472 (a special symbol variation display and a normal symbol variation display are suspended). ) And the like. The game ball can reach the second start winning port 473 only when the first start winning port 472 is closed by the first shutter 474, and the game ball passes through the first shutter 474, and Since the ball cannot be entered unless the second shutter 475 is opened before passing through the second shutter 475, a privilege given based on the ball entering the first start winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473 Are different from each other (in terms of the difficulty of entering the game or simply in terms of fun), the player is given a privilege that is given based on entering the second start winning opening 473. It is desirable to be more advantageous for the user.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the game ball must be awarded to any of the start winning ports having a plurality of game balls (or when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b during a predetermined period). If the game ball is configured to win at any one of the starting prize openings having multiple game balls), it is possible to win at a timing earlier than the start prize opening where the game balls may win at a later timing. You may comprise so that the privilege to which a winning to a start winning opening which has a characteristic is thicker is provided. Further, when there are three or more start winning ports of the second start winning device 33b, the privilege of winning a prize to the start winning port at the intermediate point may be increased (more). In addition, it is configured such that the start prize opening with the larger (larger) prize bonus is located on the front side (is more prominent) on the player side than the smaller (few) start prize opening. It is desirable.

  The configuration of the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment may be embodied in another object, for example, the second variable winning device 32b. In other words, in this case, the second variable winning device 32b has a plurality of big winning holes, and the shutter opens and closes the big winning holes on the upstream side by a shutter that opens and closes each big winning hole and a communication passage that connects the big winning holes. The game balls for which the winnings are rejected are sequentially guided to the downstream large winning opening. Further, instead of the configuration in which the configuration in which the game ball is guided to another winning port when the ball has not been entered into the predetermined winning port as in the fourth embodiment, the start winning device is embodied, Or, in addition, the present invention can be applied to a variable winning device.

  (Q) Moreover, in 4th Embodiment, it is good also as providing the speed reduction means to delay the passage speed of the game ball which passes the communication channel | path 477. FIG. For example, you can install a windmill that rotates by pushing away the blades with the game ball, or a roller that rotates in the direction to send the game ball to the opposite side of the game ball (for example, it is eccentric and can send the game ball to the opposite side) There may be a phase where there is no phase, and the game ball that has entered the communication passage 477 must move downstream and reach the upper position of the second start winning opening 473).

  (R) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, and the opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited. It can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery varies, but the winning probability does not vary (is constant), and the period of high pitched state (fluctuated) that is granted after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the success / failure lottery performed when a game ball enters the 1st start prize-winning apparatus 33a and the success / failure lottery performed when a game ball enters the 2nd startup prize-winning apparatus 33b are different. The table is referred to and the distribution of the jackpot type is changed, but it may be the same.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, two start winning devices 33a and 33b are provided that display a variation of special symbols based on the detection of a game ball that has entered, and variable winnings that are released in a big hit state or a small hit state. Two devices 32a and 32b are provided, and one through gate 34 that normally displays a variation of the symbol based on the detection of the passed game ball is provided. However, the number and arrangement of these devices are particularly limited. It can be set for each model.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b held later than the variation display (first variation display) based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a that has already been held. The variation display (second variation display) based on the entry of the game ball is digested before the first variation display, and the second variation display is prioritized so as to move back and forth in the reserved order. Although it is configured to be digested automatically, it may be configured to be digested in the reserved order regardless of the first variation display or the second variation display.

  (T) In the above embodiment, the main process (see FIG. 9) is followed by the main process (see FIG. 9) in the main controller 261, but the normal process (see FIG. 10) is performed. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, The flag which shows generation | occurrence | production of ON is turned on. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (U) In the above-described embodiment, the information on whether or not a big hit state is generated is overwritten on the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area. Separately from the area, an execution area of the special variable holding area and a storage area corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3; Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. In the above embodiment, at the start of the special symbol variation display, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the process according to the confirmation process is performed. You may comprise.

  (V) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) to be detected, special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering game balls moving in the game area, and game balls entering the special start means are detected. A special start detection means for controlling and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means. Regardless of which ball is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player. The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, is a small hit state in which the variable pitching means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable pitching means is set to the first time. Whether or not to generate a jackpot state where a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a longer second time or a predetermined number of game balls enter the open variable winning means, and this is repeated a specified number of times. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, you will generate a small win status, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means You may apply to the gaming machine which generates a big hit state. In addition to pachinko machines, various ball games, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines May be.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters a special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the result of the lottery on a variable display device Is displayed (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

  Also, in general, a pachinko machine has a so-called electronic tulip that changes state between an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or cannot enter easily. And a variable pitching device called an attacker or the like. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  Further, such a variable pitching device is designed to be opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, many of the variable pitching devices periodically repeat opening and closing a plurality of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Therefore, using the fact that the variable pitching device is periodically opened and closed, when the variable pitching device is in the open state, the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the variable pitching device, By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching game balls at the timing to reach the variable ball entry device when the ball device is in the closed state, game balls that do not enter the variable winning means are reduced, and consequently The total number of game balls to be finally acquired can be increased.

  However, it is rare that a player who executes such a technical operation and a player who does not execute the player or a player who does not perform well may have a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls finally obtained. Absent.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress unfairness due to technical disparity among players.

Means A1-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A specific winning opening through which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
Closed to make it impossible or difficult for a game ball entering the specific prize opening to be placed at a specific point on the specific entry route through which the game ball will (necessarily) pass and to enter the specific prize opening. An open / close member that is changeable between a state and an open state that allows or facilitates entry,
When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, with respect to the game ball (because the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the specific point cannot pass to the specific winning a prize side) Is provided with a time difference passage opportunity giving means for giving an opportunity to pass the specific point at another (later than now) timing.

  When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the possibility that the game ball will pass the specific point to the specific prize opening side is low (virtually not), and the possibility of entering the specific prize opening is low (virtually not). On the other hand, according to this means A1-1, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the specific point passes to the specific prize opening side due to the open / close member being in the closed state. It is possible to give an opportunity to pass a specific point to a game ball that cannot be played at a timing different from usual (at a later timing). Therefore, even if the game ball is brought to a specific point as usual, the game ball is specified as compared with the case where the game ball is brought to the specific point at the timing when the specific point is closed by the opening / closing member in the closed state. By reaching the point, the possibility that the opening / closing member is in an open state at that time is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the specific point toward the specific winning opening and enters the specific winning opening. Therefore, out of the game balls launched aiming to enter the specific prize opening, the number of game balls passing through the specific point and entering the specific prize opening, and reaching the specific point, are restricted to the opening and closing members. Thus, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in the ratio to the number of game balls excluded in the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game balls launched into the game area in order to enter the specific prize opening can be efficiently entered into the specific prize opening, but the target ball that was launched aiming at the specific prize opening does not reach the ball. It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is necessary to fire a lot of game balls in order to reduce the useless balls as much as possible and enter the specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player by reducing the number of game balls necessary to advance the game, and to efficiently enter the game ball at the specific winning opening. (If you want to embody an electronic Chu, you can increase the tempo of the variable display and keep the fluctuation display on hold, and if you want to embody an attacker, make the round proceed smoothly. Can)

  Also, generally, a game ball is fired at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening and closing member is in an open state, and a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening and closing member is in a closed state. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching, it is possible to reduce game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not execute them, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design was made in consideration of the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio between the total number of game balls released and the total number of game balls released (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, the greater the number of players performing the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning and the lower the payout rate, the lower the probability of winning the game, The possibility that the ball reaches and enters the ball tends to be lowered, and there is a possibility that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation is increased. For these reasons, there is often an unfair feeling between a player who performs the technical operation and a player who does not.

  In this regard, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. Even if game balls are continuously fired, the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate or dispel feelings of unfairness with a player who eliminates the technical disparity of the player and does not perform the technical operation (not knowing, not working well, or not intentionally). it can. Also, if the above technical operation is not performed, it will be possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention to it because it will result in a loss. The game can be progressed more easily.

Means A1-2. An open / close lottery means for performing open / close lottery as to whether or not to open the open / close member based on a predetermined opportunity;
Means A1-1 is characterized in that there is a first state that wins with a first probability in the open / close lottery and a second state that wins with a second probability higher than the first probability in the open / close lottery. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A1-2, there is a second state in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening and closing member is not opened so much that the game is aimed at a specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which a game can be progressed in a small manner by launching a ball, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if a game ball is launched at a specific winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation where the launch position of the game ball has to be substantially changed, or to give an inflection to the game state, and to improve the game performance.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched aiming at the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the player is more reliably achieved. In particular, it was fired in the case of a configuration in which one game ball was paid out in response to one game ball entering the specific prize opening (as part of correcting the disparity by technical operation as described above) If the game balls do not enter the specific winning opening (assuming that the other winning openings do not basically enter the game), the number of game balls on hand will definitely decrease, but in the second state Such a situation can be remarkably suppressed when almost all of the launched game balls are configured to enter the specific winning opening. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when entering a specific winning opening, and in the second state, it is possible to more surely establish a game such as not wanting to reduce the number of game balls on hand as much as possible.

  Means A1-3. A gaming machine according to means A1-1 or A1-2, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting a moving direction and a moving speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific point (opening / closing member).

  According to the means A1-3, by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball before reaching the specific point, irregularities relating to the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the specific point can be obtained. Can be reduced. Therefore, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state by the time difference passage opportunity giving means, an opportunity to bring the game ball to a specific point at another timing is given, and the probability of entering a specific winning opening is improved. Such an effect can be further ensured. Note that the rectifying means may be composed of an accessory, a nail arrangement, or a combination of a plurality of structures.

Means A1-4. The opening / closing member includes a shutter slidable in the front-rear direction,
The opening / closing member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter into a closed position protruding into the game area, and the opening / closing member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position where the shutter is withdrawn from the gaming area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to A1-3, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means A1-4, the shutter can slide in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening by the action of dropping, and the smooth entry to the specific winning opening can be achieved. Can be realized. In addition, for example, when a specific winning opening is opened by rotating a shutter extending forward and backward, a game ball that is thought to have entered the specific winning opening is blown to the outside so as to be launched by the shutter. Such a situation can be avoided. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the shutter that extends forward and backward is rotated downward to open the specific prize opening, a large number of game balls fall on the shutter at a time and the shutter is released even though it is not at the timing of opening, and the game It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters a specific winning opening.

  In addition, a shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position is likely to be subjected to a relatively large load. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce a burden on the root portion side of the shutter, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shutter is broken on the root portion side.

  It should be noted that “a rib is formed on the back side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. In addition, “a cushioning material may be provided on the shutter or a member that supports the shutter in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, the impact when the shutter receives a game ball can be reduced, and damage and collision noise can be suppressed.

  Means A2-1. The time difference passage opportunity giving means is an introduction path through which a game ball in which passage of the specific point to the specific prize opening side is regulated by the open / close member in a closed state (although the specific point is reached) is guided. And a re-entry path for guiding a game ball that has entered the introduction path to the specific point, the gaming machine according to means A1.

  According to the means A2-1, the game ball has reached a specific point, but the opening and closing member has not yet been opened, so that the game ball is crushed for a while and then goes to the specific point again. A series of operations can be derived. That is, the opening and closing member was closed when the game ball first reached the specific point, but at the timing when the game ball reached the specific point again after a predetermined time via the time difference passage opportunity giving means, May be open. Therefore, even if the first attempt to pass a specific point fails, the same game ball can access the specific point multiple times so that it can be retried later. The above-described effects such as efficiently allowing a game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening are surely achieved. Of course, if the opening and closing member is open when the game ball first reaches the specific point, the game ball will pass the specific point and enter the specific winning opening at that stage. .

  Means A2-2. The gaming machine according to means A2-1, wherein the game ball that has reached the specific point is guided to the introduction path by the open / close member that is in a closed state.

  According to the means A2-2, when the open / close member that opens and closes the route to the specific winning opening is closed, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path by the open / close member, so the game ball is guided to the introduction path. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for the purpose, and the structure can be simplified, the size can be suppressed, the cost can be suppressed, and the like. In this means, the opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes a part of the means for giving the time difference passage opportunity to the game ball.

  The opening / closing member includes a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction, and the opening / closing member is closed when the shutter is displaced to a closed position protruding into the game area, so that the shutter is withdrawn from the game area. It is good also as that the said opening-and-closing member is made into an open state by displacing to an open position. In this case, the game ball can be configured to enter the specific winning opening by the action of falling, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the shutter in the closed position.

  Means A2-3. The re-entry route of the game ball that reaches the specific point again from the specific point through the introduction path and the re-entry path is configured not to cross at least other than the specific point. A gaming machine according to A2-1 or A2-2.

  Means A2-3. In the middle of the re-entry route, it is possible to prevent a situation in which game balls collide head-on. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably guide the game ball moving on the re-entry route to the specific point at the initial timing. Even if the game balls collide with each other at a specific point, if the open / close member is in an open state, the specific point passes through the specific prize opening side as it is.

Means A2-4. Normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass or enter,
Special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means capable of changing a state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
A normal start detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
Support lottery execution means for performing a ballot support lottery for determining whether or not to open the special starter based on detection by the normal start detector;
Based on the detection by the special start detection means, it comprises a lottery execution means for determining whether or not to open the variable winning means,
The specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state that wins with a first probability in the pitch support lottery and a second state that wins with a second probability higher than the first probability in the pitch support lottery,
In the state where the variable winning means is opened in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in an open state, the support lottery is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A2-1 to A2-3, wherein the variable winning means is arranged upstream of the special starting means in the game area.

  According to the means A2-4, in the state where the variable winning means is opened in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in the open state, the support lottery is in the first gaming state, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most of the game balls go through the introduction path and the re-entry path. On the other hand, for example, if the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the approach of the game ball to the variable winning means is delayed by the amount that the game ball passes through the introduction path and the re-entry path. In particular, in a re-entry route of a game ball from a specific point through an introduction route and a re-entry route to the specific point again, if the re-entry route crosses even on the specific point, the game ball There is a risk that it will be difficult for the game balls to enter by the variable winning means, for example, due to contact with each other and a longer residence time in the special starting means. In this regard, by placing the variable winning means upstream of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the variable winning means. Furthermore, in a state where the variable winning means is in the open state, the burden on the opening / closing member is reduced by reducing the number of game balls that enter the special starting means (the opening and closing member prevents entry to the specific winning opening). It can be reduced.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the upstream variable winning means and flows to the special starting means side. Therefore, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize a state in which a large amount of game balls enter and the flow becomes worse in the special starting means.

Means A3-1. The opening / closing member includes a shutter that is displaceable between a closed position that disables the entry of a game ball into the specific prize opening and an open position that enables the entry of the game ball,
When the shutter is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening is regulated by the shutter moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining a contact state with the shutter Because
The time difference passage opportunity giving means is configured by the shutter,
The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein when the shutter is in the open position, a game ball that is in contact with the shutter enters the specific winning opening.

  According to the means A3-1, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the specific point is restricted from entering the specific winning opening by the shutter, but directly contacts the shutter. It moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the state. When the opening / closing member is opened, that is, when the shutter is opened, the game ball that is in contact with the shutter (was leaning on or is placed) passes the specific point and is specified. You will enter the winning entrance. In this way, by making the stay time at a specific point of the game ball as long as possible, if the open / close member is in the open state, the player can enter the specific winning opening and wait for the timing when the open / close member is next opened. Can do. Therefore, the above-described effects such as efficiently allowing the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening to enter the specific winning opening are surely achieved.

  Furthermore, even when the opening time of the open / close member is relatively short, a game ball leaning against the shutter (for example, placed) can be entered into the specific winning opening. That is, for example, a game ball can be placed on the shutter when the shutter is closed, and all of the balls can enter the specific winning opening with a short opening of the shutter. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without increasing the total opening time of the opening / closing member. For this reason, when the specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are embodied as an attacker that is opened in the case of winning or failing lottery and becomes a special gaming state, the game balls accumulated on the shutter during the round interval are rounded. With the start, the player enters the attacker, so that time efficiency can be improved. In addition, when it is embodied in an electric chew that is released when the winning support lottery is won and the player enters the support state, more game balls can be inserted without lengthening the opening time. It becomes feasible, and this can create new playability.

Means A3-2. The shutter is configured to be slidable back and forth, and extends in the front-rear direction in the closed position, and the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction,
The game according to means A3-1, wherein when the shutter is in the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specific winning opening. Machine.

  According to the means A3-2, the shutter in the closed position that closes the specific winning opening extends forward and backward, and when the shutter is in the open position, the game ball that has lost the support of the shutter falls downward. It is designed to enter the specific winning opening. For this reason, for example, the action and reaction of the game ball until the game ball enters the specific prize opening is faster than the case where the game ball enters the specific prize opening by moving the game ball backward and moving backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to relatively quickly enter the game ball that has been restricted from entering the specific prize opening by the shutter.

  Means A3-3. A gaming machine according to means A3-1 or A3-2, comprising a rectifying means for guiding a game ball to an upstream portion of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-3, the state in which the game ball is brought into contact with the shutter (the state in which the shutter is placed) is made as long as possible by reliably guiding the game ball to the upstream portion with respect to the shutter. The effect is more reliably achieved.

  Means A3-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-2, comprising drop-off prevention means for maintaining a state in which the game ball is in contact with the shutter.

  According to the means A3-4, it is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping from the upper surface of the shutter.

  Means A3-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to means A3-4, wherein small irregularities are formed on an upper surface of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-5, if the opening / closing member is in the open position, it is possible to keep a state where it is possible to enter the specific winning opening as long as possible.

Means A3-6. Normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through;
Special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means capable of changing a state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
Normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
Support lottery execution means for performing a ballot support lottery for determining whether or not to open the special starter based on detection by the normal start detector;
Based on the detection by the special start detection means, it comprises a lottery execution means for determining whether or not to open the variable winning means,
The specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are adapted to the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-5, wherein in the game area, the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means.

  As in the means A3-1, the shutter of the open / close member in the closed state needs to support the game ball (particularly, when the shutter extends back and forth, it supports the lower surface side of the game ball) There is a heavy burden when receiving a falling game ball. In this regard, as in the present means A3-6, by arranging the variable winning means downstream of the special starting means, the number of game balls that move toward the variable winning means by the amount that enters the special starting means can be reduced. As a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means A4-1. The time difference passage opportunity giving means is installed on the upstream side of the specific point in the specific entry route,
When the opening / closing member is in an open state, or in a state substantially equivalent to an open state, the game ball reaches the specific point after a first time has elapsed since reaching the time difference passage opportunity giving means. The time difference passing opportunity grant means is opened,
When the opening / closing member is in the closed state or in a state substantially equivalent to the closed state, the time difference passage opportunity giving means is closed, and the game is caused by the action of the time difference passage opportunity giving means in the closed state. The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein the game machine is configured to reach the specific point after elapse of a second time longer than the first time after the ball reaches the time difference passage opportunity giving means.

  When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, even if the game ball that has reached the time difference passage opportunity grant means flows down to the specific point as it is, it is blocked by the closed opening and closing member and enters the specific winning opening. I can't. In such a case, according to the means A4-1, the opening and closing member is closed as much as possible by delaying the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point instead of causing the game ball to reach the specific point at normal timing. When not in a state, that is, when the opening / closing member is in the open state, the game ball can be configured to reach a specific point. Therefore, the above-described effects such as efficiently allowing the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening to enter the specific winning opening are surely achieved.

  Note that the time required for the game ball to reach the specific point from the time difference passage opportunity giving unit varies depending on the distance between the specific point and the time difference passage opportunity giving unit. For this reason, for example, if the opening / closing member is simply in the open state, the specific point can be passed if the game ball is brought to the specific point as it is with the time difference passage opportunity giving means open. It cannot be said that it will be a correspondence. For that reason, “when the opening and closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to the open state”, “when the opening and closing member is substantially in a state corresponding to the closed state” is a specific point, Considering the distance to the time difference passing opportunity giving means, etc., when the game ball located in the time difference passing opportunity giving means reaches a specific point, the opening / closing member will be open, etc. Based on the above simulation and the like, the timing and the period for setting the time difference passage opportunity giving means to the closed state are set for each model.

  Moreover, it is good also as providing the synchronizing means which synchronizes the opening-and-closing timing of an opening-and-closing member and the time difference passage opportunity provision means operation timing. The synchronizing means may be, for example, an interlocking mechanism that is mechanically interlocked, or may be a control means that opens and operates with the same opening and operation triggers and opening and operating conditions, Control means for adjusting the timing by measuring the opening timing of the opening and closing member may be used.

  Means A4-2. The means for providing a time difference passage opportunity includes a stopper capable of changing a state between a first state where the game ball is stopped and a second state where the game ball is allowed to pass without stopping. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A4-2, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball can be stopped upstream of the specific point. Therefore, by shifting the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball reaches the specific point when the opening / closing member is opened.

  Means A4-3. The gaming machine according to means A4-1, wherein the time difference passage opportunity giving means includes a route changing means capable of increasing or decreasing the distance of a route through which the game ball reaches the specific point. .

  According to the means A4-3, the timing at the specific point can be delayed by turning the game ball more than usual.

Means A4-4. A support lottery execution means for performing a pitching support lottery as to whether or not to open the opening and closing member;
Variable display means for displaying a variable display for teaching the result of the pitching support lottery,
In the state where the variable display means is performing the variable display, the time difference passage opportunity giving means is closed,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A4-1 to A4-3, wherein the time difference passage opportunity giving means is in an open state when the variable display is stopped and displayed in the variable display means.

  According to the means A4-4, the game ball is guided to the specific prize opening in a situation where the game ball is likely to enter the specific prize opening, and the game ball is assumed to be difficult to enter the specific prize opening. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of reaching the specific winning opening is shifted (later).

  The means A2, A3, A4 are basically considered to be used singly, respectively, but the means A2 has a configuration downstream of a specific point, and the means A3 has a specific point. Since the means A4 has a configuration upstream of the specific point, it is possible to separate the squeeze, and in some cases, these can be used in combination.

Means B-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A specific winning opening through which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
An opening / closing member capable of changing a state between an open state allowing a game ball to enter the specific winning opening and a closed state disabling the entry,
If the open / close member is in the closed state when the open / close member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening if the open / close member is in the open state, the open / close member is A game machine characterized by further comprising a pitching opportunity giving means for guiding to a second specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening when the ball is in the open state.

  According to the means B-1, when the opening / closing member is in the closed state, if the opening / closing member is in the open state, the game ball has reached the first specific point that can enter the specific winning opening. In addition, the game ball is guided to the second specific point where the specific winning opening can be entered if the opening / closing member is in the open state. For this reason, a game ball that could not enter the specific prize opening will be given another opportunity to try to enter the specific prize opening, and the possibility of the game ball entering the specific prize opening will be increased. Can do. Therefore, in the ratio of the number of game balls that entered the specific prize opening and the number of game balls that did not enter the specific prize opening, out of the game balls launched aiming to enter the specific prize opening The ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased.

  Further, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing at which the opening / closing member is closed, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. The occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening will be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the game balls to be acquired between a player who performs a so-called technical operation such as stopping and a player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means B-2. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A first specific winning port and a second specific winning port in which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
A game ball entering the first specific winning opening is disposed at a first specific point on the first specific winning route through which the game ball will (necessarily) pass, and the game ball enters the first specific winning opening. A first opening / closing member that is changeable between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that enables or facilitates entry,
A game ball entering the second specific winning opening is arranged at a second specific point on the second specific winning route through which the game ball will pass (always), and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening. A second opening / closing member that is changeable between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that enables or facilitates entry,
When the first opening / closing member is in the closed state (because the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point cannot be passed to the first specific prize opening side). ) A gaming machine, characterized by comprising a pitching opportunity giving means for guiding the gaming ball to the second specific pitch route.

  When the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, it is unlikely (effectively) that the game ball will pass the first specific point to the first specific prize opening side, and is expected to enter the first specific prize opening. There are few (virtually not). On the other hand, according to the means B-1, when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point is set to the first specific point because the first opening / closing member is in the closed state. A game ball that cannot pass to the one specific winning opening side can be guided to a second specific winning route that leads to the second specific winning opening. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the second specific prize opening is given to the game balls that could not enter the first specific prize opening, and the game balls are given the specific prize opening (the first specific prize opening). And the possibility of entering the second specific winning opening). Therefore, out of the game balls launched aiming to enter the specific prize opening, the number of game balls passing through the specific point and entering the specific prize opening, and reaching the specific point, are restricted to the opening and closing members. Thus, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening can be increased in the ratio to the number of game balls excluded in the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. As a result, the game balls launched into the game area in order to enter the specific prize opening can be efficiently entered into the specific prize opening, but the target ball that was launched aiming at the specific prize opening does not reach the ball. It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is necessary to fire a lot of game balls in order to reduce the useless balls as much as possible and enter the specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player by reducing the number of game balls necessary to advance the game, and to efficiently enter the game ball at the specific winning opening. (If it is embodied in electric Chu, the number of rotations of the variable display can be increased, and if embodied in an attacker, the round can be smoothly advanced).

  Also, generally, a game ball is fired at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening and closing member is in an open state, and a game ball is shot at a timing that reaches a specific point when the opening and closing member is in a closed state. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching, it is possible to reduce game balls that do not enter the specific winning opening. On the other hand, there are players who execute such technical operations and players who do not execute them, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design was made in consideration of the actual situation in the gaming hall, etc., and the ratio between the total number of game balls released and the total number of game balls released (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the player who performed the technical operation. In particular, the greater the number of players performing the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning and the lower the payout rate, the lower the probability of winning the game, The possibility that the ball reaches and enters the ball tends to be lowered, and there is a possibility that the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation is increased. For these reasons, there is often an unfair feeling between a player who performs the technical operation and a player who does not.

  In this regard, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing to reach the first specific point when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball enters the second specific prize opening. Since there is a possibility, even if the game ball is continuously fired, the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening (the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening) is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate or dispel feelings of unfairness with a player who eliminates the technical disparity of the player and does not perform the technical operation (not knowing, not working well, or not intentionally). it can. Also, if the above technical operation is not performed, it will be possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention to it because it will result in a loss. The game can be progressed more easily.

  As a matter of course, if the first opening / closing member is in the open state when the game ball first reaches the first specific point, the game ball passes the first specific point at that stage and passes through the first specific prize. You will enter the mouth. Further, the timing when the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are opened and the timing when they are closed may be the same. Furthermore, the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening have the same role. For example, regardless of which of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening a game ball enters, The number of game values (prize balls) to be paid out may be the same. When a predetermined lottery is performed based on the balls entered into the first specific winning port and the second specific winning port, the same random number counter and the same A lottery table may be used, and as a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening are set to an open state with a lapse of a specified time or a specified number of balls as an upper limit. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of round periods, which are periods, are provided while sandwiching an interval period that is in a closed state, a round is entered regardless of which ball is entered into the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening. Number of pitches to measure up to the upper limit of the period It may be counted. In addition, by connecting the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member so as to operate integrally, it is possible to share the driving means for operating them, or to control the drive separately. In this case, it is not necessary to perform control or the like for measuring the timing of synchronization, and the configuration and control can be simplified.

Means B-3. An open / close lottery means for performing open / close lottery as to whether or not to open the open / close member based on a predetermined opportunity;
Means B-1 or B1 characterized in that there is a first state that wins with a first probability in the open / close lottery and a second state that wins with a second probability higher than the first probability in the open / close lottery A gaming machine according to B-2.

  According to the means B-3, there is a second state in which the opening / closing member is opened relatively frequently and a first state in which the opening / closing member is not opened so much that the game is aimed at the specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which a game can be progressed in a small manner by launching a ball, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if a game ball is launched at a specific winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation where the launch position of the game ball has to be substantially changed, or to give an inflection to the game state, and to improve the game performance.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched aiming at the specific winning opening may be configured to enter the specific winning opening. In this case, the effect of suppressing the technical disparity of the player is more reliably achieved. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering the specific prize opening, if the launched game ball does not enter the specific prize opening (others Although the number of game balls on hand is definitely reduced, it is assumed that almost no game balls fired in the second state will enter the specific prize opening. In the case of a configuration that does this, such a situation can be drastically suppressed. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when entering a specific winning opening, and in the second state, it is possible to more surely establish a game such as not wanting to reduce the number of game balls on hand as much as possible.

  Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, wherein a rectifying means for adjusting a moving direction and a moving speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the first specific point.

  According to the means B-4, by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball before reaching the first specific point, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the first specific point are provided. Irregularity related to can be reduced. Therefore, when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball is sent to the second specific pitch route by the pitch opportunity granting means to improve the probability of entering the second specific prize opening. The effect can be further ensured.

  Note that the rectifying means may be composed of an accessory, a nail arrangement, or a combination of a plurality of structures.

Means B-5. The opening / closing member (corresponding to means B-2, at least the first opening / closing member) includes a shutter slidable in the front-rear direction,
The opening / closing member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter into a closed position protruding into the game area, and the opening / closing member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position where the shutter is withdrawn from the gaming area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, further comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means B-5, the shutter can slide in the front-rear direction so that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening by the action of dropping, and for example, the specific winning opening can be set with the rotating shutter. In the case of closing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a game ball that is considered to have entered the specific winning opening is blown off to the outside by being launched by the shutter.

  In addition, a shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the game ball when in the closed position is likely to be subjected to a relatively large load. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce a burden on the root portion side of the shutter, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shutter is broken on the root portion side.

  It should be noted that “a rib is formed on the back side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. In addition, “a cushioning material may be provided in a portion of the opening / closing member that contacts the game ball and restricts the passage of the game ball through the specific point”. In this case, the impact when the shutter receives a game ball can be reduced.

  Means B-6. When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the first specific point is in the closed state to the second point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route). The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, characterized by being guided by the opening / closing member.

  According to the means B-6, when the opening and closing member that opens and closes the first specific point (the first specific winning route to the first specific winning opening) is closed, the opening and closing member allows the game ball to be moved to the second specific point ( Since it is possible to guide to the second specific entry route), it is not necessary to separately provide a movable member for guiding the game ball to the second specific point (second specific entry route), and the structure is simplified. Further, it is possible to suppress the increase in size and the increase in cost. Moreover, in this means, the (first) opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes a ball entry opportunity giving means.

  Means B-7. The second specific point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route) can be entered only when a game ball is guided by the entry opportunity grant means. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6.

  There is a possibility that a game ball that could not enter the (1) specific winning opening at the first specific point may enter the (2) specific winning opening at the second specific point, but at the second specific point (the first 2) Since there is no possibility that a game ball that could not enter the specific winning opening will enter the specific winning opening at the first specific point (1) When the second specific point is configured to allow the game ball to enter the (second) specific winning opening, the possibility that the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening decreases. In this regard, according to the means B-7, first, the first specific point (first) is entered into the specific winning opening, and if it is not, the second specific point (second) specific winning The order of entering the mouth can be observed, and the effect of improving the possibility of entering the specific winning opening is more reliably achieved.

Means B-8. Normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass or enter,
Special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means capable of changing a state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
A normal start detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
Support lottery execution means for performing a ballot support lottery for determining whether or not to open the special starter based on detection by the normal start detector;
Based on the detection by the special start detection means, it comprises a lottery execution means for determining whether or not to open the variable winning means,
The specific prize opening, and the opening and closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state that wins with a first probability in the pitch support lottery and a second state that wins with a second probability higher than the first probability in the pitch support lottery,
In the state where the variable winning means is opened in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in an open state, the support lottery is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein the variable winning means is arranged upstream of the special starting means in the game area.

  According to the means B-8, when the variable winning means is opened in the winning lottery and the variable winning means is in the open state, the support lottery is in the first gaming state, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most of the game balls are discharged to the outside of the special starting means via the second specific winning route, and further, without entering the second specific winning opening. On the other hand, for example, if the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the game balls will pass through the special starting means (the first specific entry route and the second specific entry route). The approach to the ball variable winning means is delayed. In this regard, by placing the variable winning means upstream of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the variable winning means.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the game ball enters the upstream variable winning means and flows to the special starting means side. Therefore, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize a state in which a large amount of game balls enter and the flow becomes worse in the special starting means.

  C. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters a special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hit state is generated, and the result of the lottery on a variable display device Is displayed (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-154110).

  In general, the state of a pachinko machine changes between an open state in which a game ball can be entered or is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter. A variable pitching device is provided to which a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded by balling.

  By the way, in the special game state where the variable pitching device is in the open state, even if the game ball is continuously fired at a constant rhythm, various game members such as game nails are arranged in the game area. There is a concern that the timing at which the variable pitching device is released and the timing at which the game ball reaches the variable pitching device do not mesh well, making it difficult to enter the ball.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a game ball enter a variable ball entry device more efficiently. is there.

Means C-1. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A variable ball entry device that changes state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which entry is impossible or difficult to enter;
The variable pitching device is:
A specific winning opening through which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
A shutter that is displaceable between a closed position that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening and an open position that enables the game to enter,
When the shutter is in the closed position, a game opportunity giving means for displacing the game ball, which is restricted from entering the specific winning opening by the shutter, in a specified direction while maintaining a contact state with the shutter. Prepared,
A gaming machine configured such that when the shutter is in an open position, a game ball in contact with the shutter enters the specific winning opening.

  According to the means C-1, when the variable pitching device is in the closed state, the game balls that have reached the variable pitching device are restricted from winning the specific prize opening by the shutter, but directly to the shutter. It will move to a specified direction, maintaining the contact state. Then, when the shutter is in the open position and the variable pitching device is in the open state, almost all of the game balls that are in contact with the shutter (was leaning on or placed) are in the specific winning opening. You will enter the ball. Thus, if the variable pitching device is in the open state, it is specified by lengthening the staying time of the game ball at the position (state) where it will enter the specific winning opening if the shutter is in the open position. While maintaining the state of the game ball that can enter the winning opening, it is possible to wait for the timing when the variable pitching device is next opened. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the game balls launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening into the specific winning opening.

  Furthermore, even if the opening time of the variable pitching device is relatively short, a game ball leaning against the shutter (for example, placed) can be entered into the specific winning opening. . That is, for example, as long as a game ball is placed on the shutter when the shutter is closed, it is possible to enter all of them into the specific winning opening with a short opening of the shutter. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without increasing the total opening time of the variable entry device. For this reason, when the specific winning opening and the opening / closing member are embodied as an attacker that is opened in the case of winning or failing lottery and becomes a special gaming state, the game balls accumulated on the shutter during the round interval are rounded. With the start, the player enters the attacker, so that time efficiency can be improved. In addition, when it is embodied in an electric chew that is released when the winning support lottery is won and the player enters the support state, more game balls can be inserted without lengthening the opening time. It becomes feasible, and this can create new playability.

  In addition, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing at which the variable pitching device is closed, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening, so the game ball is continuously fired. However, the occurrence of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning opening will be suppressed. For this reason, in a state where the variable pitching device is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, a special game state advantageous to the player) with a period in which it is closed, technical operations such as so-called hitting are performed. It is possible to reduce (substantially eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the game and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  Means C-2. The entrance opportunity providing means moves the game ball in contact with the shutter in the closed position by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. The gaming machine according to means C-1, which is characterized by the above.

  According to the means C-2, when the shutter is in the open position, it is possible to keep a state where the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening for as long as possible. Therefore, even if the game ball is launched at such a timing as to reach the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state during the period in which the variable ball entry device is opened multiple times, The game ball immediately stays within that range while moving at a position where it can enter the variable pitching device as soon as the variable pitching device is opened, and the variable pitching device is then opened. Can wait for the timing. As a result, the above-mentioned operation and effect of increasing the possibility of entering the variable entry device can be achieved more reliably.

  For example, “at least the shutter in the closed position extends back and forth, and a game ball can be placed on the upper surface thereof, and the entry opportunity granting unit is configured to play the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter, On the upper surface of the shutter, the distance may be moved longer than the width of the shutter in the longitudinal direction (for example, while meandering).

  In addition, it is good also as "the small unevenness | corrugation is formed in the upper surface of the said shutter as said entrance opportunity provision means." In this case, when the shutter is in the open position, the effect of keeping the state where it is possible to enter the specific winning opening as long as possible is reliably exhibited. In addition, for example, the upper surface of the shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape with a low center and a high left and right, so that a game ball mounted on the shutter rolls back and forth in the left and right direction and drops from the shutter when the momentum is weakened. May be.

Means C-3. The shutter protrudes into the game area and extends in the front-rear direction above the specific prize opening, and an open position where all or most of the shutter exits the game area and opens the specific prize opening upward It can be slid back and forth between
The means C-1 or C- is characterized in that when the shutter is in the open position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter enters the specific winning opening. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.

  According to the means C-3, when the variable pitching device is in the closed state, the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the shutter (accumulating), and the support of the shutter is lost when the variable pitching device is in the open state. When the game ball falls downward, it enters the specific winning opening. For this reason, for example, the action and reaction of the game ball until the game ball enters the specific prize opening is faster than the case where the game ball enters the specific prize opening by moving the game ball backward and moving backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to make a game ball whose entry into the specific winning opening restricted by the shutter enter the specific winning opening relatively quickly.

  In addition, for example, when a specific winning opening is opened by rotating a shutter extending forward and backward, a game ball that is thought to have entered the specific winning opening is blown to the outside so as to be launched by the shutter. Such a situation can be avoided. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the shutter that extends forward and backward is rotated downward to open the specific winning opening, a large number of game balls fall on the shutter at once, and the shutter is not at the timing of opening due to weight or impact. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is released to the specific winning opening.

  “The shutter has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction, and the entrance opportunity granting unit is configured to cause the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter to be substantially rectangular in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. It is also possible to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter toward the downstream side in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while meandering in a crossing direction. Generally, the width before and after the game area defined by the game board and the transparent plate-like body arranged in front of the game board is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is meandered in a direction intersecting the short-side direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, or from the center side to the outer peripheral side of the substantially circular shutter. If it is attempted to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while turning it, it becomes necessary to make the front and rear width of the shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area, and the game ball moving on the shutter There is a possibility that a point behind the front of the game board must be selected as a suitable starting point. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this regard, if the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is simply meandered in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, the front-rear width of the shutter is made wider than the front-rear width of the game area. Even if not, the game ball placed on the shutter can be moved a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Means C-4. The gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the entrance opportunity giving means is formed by forming irregularities on the upper surface of the shutter.

  For example, instead of forming irregularities on the shutter side, above the shutter in the closed position, by forming a protrusion that protrudes from the peripheral edge of the opening of the specific winning opening to the inner peripheral side, it constitutes a pitching opportunity giving means However, when the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is moved while being guided and meandered by the protrusions, the protrusions can be moved from the peripheral edge of the opening of the specific winning opening even if the shutter is displaced to the open position. Since it remains in the state of protruding to the peripheral side, there is a possibility that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening may be reduced.

  In this regard, as in the present means C-4, if the shutter is displaced to the open position by forming irregularities constituting the entrance opportunity giving means on the shutter side, the entrance opportunity giving means is Since most of them leave the game area, it is possible to eliminate such problems.

Means C-5. The variable pitching device includes a substantially plate-like base plate attached to a game board,
The base plate is formed with an accommodating opening for allowing the shutter to appear and disappear,
The upper part of the accommodation opening of the front surface of the base plate is inclined rearward upward,
The gaming machine according to means C-4, characterized in that the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the shutter can be brought into contact with a portion below the center of the gaming ball.

  When the shutter is configured to extend back and forth and be displaceable back and forth as in the above means C-3, and when unevenness is formed on the upper surface of the shutter as in the above means C-4, When the shutter is pulled to the game board side to be in the open position, there is a concern that the game ball placed on the shutter may be pressed by the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate and be bounced off by that force. The

  In this regard, according to the means C-5, when the shutter is set to the open position, it is assumed that the game ball placed on the shutter is in a position that is likely to be sandwiched between the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate. However, the shutter is relatively smooth so that the game ball is placed on the upper part of the accommodation opening of the base plate that is inclined backward and is in contact with the lower part of the game ball. You can get over the convex part to the specific prize opening side. Therefore, the game ball placed on the shutter when the shutter is set to the open position can be more reliably entered into the specific winning opening, and damage to the variable pitching device can be suppressed.

  Means C-6. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-5, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter is displaced to the closed position. .

  According to the means C-6, the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower side of the game ball when it is in the closed position is likely to be subjected to a relatively large load, but the receiver that supports the lower surface of the front end of the shutter. By providing the member, it is possible to reduce a burden on the root portion side of the shutter, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shutter is broken on the root portion side.

  It should be noted that “a rib is formed on the back side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the game ball collides with the shutter. In addition, “a cushioning material may be provided on the shutter or a member that supports the shutter in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, the impact when the shutter receives a game ball can be reduced, and damage and collision noise can be suppressed.

Means C-7. Normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through;
Special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means capable of changing a state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
Normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
Support lottery execution means for performing a ballot support lottery for determining whether or not to open the special starter based on detection by the normal start detector;
Based on the detection by the special start detection means, it comprises a lottery execution means for determining whether or not to open the variable winning means,
The variable winning device is constituted by the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein in the game area, the variable winning means is arranged downstream of the special starting means.

  As in the above means C-3, the shutter in the closed position needs to receive the game ball that has fallen, and the burden on such occasions is large. In this regard, like the present means C-7, the variable winning means as the variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the special starting means, so that it is directed toward the variable winning means as much as it enters the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-8. Normal starting means configured to allow a game ball moving in the game area to pass through;
Special starting means capable of changing the state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
A variable winning means capable of changing a state between an open state in which a game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
Normal start detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means;
Support lottery execution means for performing a ballot support lottery for determining whether or not to open the special starter based on detection by the normal start detector;
Based on the detection by the special start detection means, it comprises a lottery execution means for determining whether or not to open the variable winning means,
The variable pitching device is constituted by the special starting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-6, wherein in the game area, the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means.

  The shutter in the closed position needs to receive a game ball that has fallen, and the burden on the shutter is large. In this regard, as in the present means C-8, the special starting means as the variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning means so that the amount of entering the variable winning means is directed toward the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

  Means C-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 and C-8, characterized in that a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball is provided upstream of the variable pitching device.

  According to the means C-9, by providing a rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball before reaching the variable pitching apparatus, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball entering the variable pitching apparatus. Irregularity related to can be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to suppress variations in the point of falling onto the shutter, that is, the start point of the game ball that moves while contacting the shutter. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress variations in the initial speed of the game ball that moves while contacting the shutter. Therefore, the above-described effects such as increasing the probability of entering a specific winning opening by increasing the time for the game ball to move while contacting the shutter as much as possible are further exhibited.

  It should be noted that “the rectifying means guides the game ball to the upstream portion of the shutter”. Further, the rectifying means may be constituted by an accessory, a nail arrangement, or a combination of a plurality of configurations.

Means C-10. The shutter is
A first shutter that extends at least in the closed position and can close the specific winning opening;
A second shutter that extends forward and backward at least in the closed position, and is provided above the first shutter with a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the first shutter;
The first shutter and the second shutter are configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position at the same time,
The game ball dropped on the second shutter in the closed position moves on the second shutter, falls on the first shutter in the closed position, moves on the first shutter,
When the first shutter and the second shutter at the closed position are displaced to the open position, the game balls placed on the first shutter and the second shutter enter the specific winning opening. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-9.

  According to the means C-10, the position and speed of the game ball falling on the first shutter can be limited to some extent by the second shutter, and the movement of the game ball on the first shutter can be made suitable. . Further, not only the game ball placed on the first shutter in the closed position but also the game ball placed on the second shutter in the closed position, the first shutter and the second shutter are displaced to the open position. Thus, since the ball is entered into the specific winning opening, the effect of making the game ball efficiently enter the specific winning opening is more reliably achieved.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decoration symbol display device, 43L ... first special display device, 43R ... second special display device, 46 ... hold lamp, 223a, 223b ... count switch, 224a, 224b ... start winning switch, 225 ... through gate switch, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub Control device.

Claims (4)

A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A specific winning opening through which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
An opening / closing member capable of changing a state between an open state allowing a game ball to enter the specific winning opening and a closed state disabling the entry,
If the open / close member is in the closed state when the open / close member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening if the open / close member is in the open state, the open / close member is A game machine characterized by further comprising a pitching opportunity giving means for guiding to a second specific point that can be entered in the specific winning opening when the ball is in the open state. A game area where game balls launched by the launching means are guided; and
A first specific winning port and a second specific winning port in which a game ball moving in the gaming area can enter;
Arranged at the first specific point on the first specific winning route through which the game ball entering the first specific winning opening passes, and it is impossible to enter the gaming ball into the first specific winning opening Or a first opening / closing member that is changeable between a closed state that makes it difficult and an open state that enables or facilitates entry,
Arranged at a second specific point on the second specific winning route through which a game ball entering the second specific winning opening passes, and it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second specific winning opening Or a second opening / closing member that is changeable between a closed state that makes it difficult and an open state that enables or facilitates entry,
A gaming machine, comprising: a ball opportunity opportunity for guiding a game ball to the second specific ball route when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state.   The game ball that has reached the first specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state is guided to the second point by the opening / closing member in the closed state. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to enter the second specific point only when the game ball is guided by the entry opportunity grant unit. 5.

Images